Africa being an accurate description of the regions of Ægypt, Barbary, Lybia, and Billedulgerid, the land of Negroes, Guinee, Æthiopia and the Abyssines : with all the adjacent islands, either in the Mediterranean, Atlantick, Southern or Oriental Sea, belonging thereunto : with the several denominations fo their coasts, harbors, creeks, rivers, lakes, cities, towns, castles, and villages, their customs, modes and manners, languages, religions and inexhaustible treasure : with their governments and policy, variety of trade and barter : and also of their wonderful plants, beasts, birds and serpents : collected and translated from most authentick authors and augmented with later observations : illustrated with notes and adorn'd with peculiar maps and proper sculptures / by John Ogilby, Esq. ...

The African Islands, 659. stand in this order.

• Madagascar
  • Carkanossi
    • Towns Franshere, Imanhal, Cokombes, Andravoulle, Ambonnetanaha, Mazomamou, Imouze, Mazes••••∣touts, Hatare, and Fananghaa, besides others; and the Fort Dauphine.
    • Rivers Franshere, Akondre, Imanhal, Manambaton, Manghafia, Harougazarak, Foutak, and Sama.
    • Mountains Vohitsmassian, the Naked Mountain, and some others.
  • Manatengha
    • Towns Amboulle, Izame.
    • Rivers Manatengha.
  • Vohitsbang Rivers Daviboulle, Dandraghinta, Sandrivinangha, Monamboudrou, Massianash, Mananghare.
  • Itomampo Rivers Itomampo, Jonghainow, Morqua, Mangharak.
  • Eringdrane Rivers Mangharak, Marsiatre.
  • Matatane Rivers Outhaivon, Manghasiouts. Mananghare, Mana, Irin, Itapoulabei, Itapoulosirire, Itapaulomai•• thairanou, Faroan, Lamohorik, Manataraven, Mananzau, Andredi, Tenasataniamou, Tera••∣minri, Avibaha, Tsabsacke, Fouchurao, Juorhon.
  • Manghabei
    • Rivers Voulouilou, Maransatran, Marinhou, Jamiami, Mandreri.
    • Towns Rabsimelone, St. Angelo, besides four other, very Populous.
  • Ampatte
    • Towns None, onely some large Villages, and one Fort.
    • Rivers Manamboulle, Manamba, Menerandre, The Salt-River, Siveh, Youronbehok, Yorlaghe.
    • Mountains Hiecla, and another Hill.
  • Mackicore Rivers Ranoumanithi, Ranoumene, Sohavianh, Soumada, Manatangh.
• St. Apollony Nothing considerable; scarcely inhabited.
• Mauritius Isle, or Cerne. Affording nothing but Beasts and Fowl.
• The Islands Primicras Onely some scatter'd Huts.
• Gomorre and Gomara Reasonably well peopled, but without Towns; the Houses built of Stone, dawb'd over with Mortar.
• The Island of Ferdi∣nand Po No People of Europe have ever Traded there; and consequently, unknown.
• Princes Island One Town, inhabited by Portuguese, and Slaves, to about 3000.
• Anaboon One Town, and some few Villages.
• St. Thomas
  • Towns Pauosan, well-fortified; St. Sebastians Castle.
  • Rivers Two small ones, without name.
• Ilha Rolles Ilha des Ca∣bres Caracombo St. Matthias Ascension Island. All places in a manner desolate, and void of Inhabitants; onely Carocombo has one remarkable Hut, but many more remarkably immodest Women: But they all produce variety of Foul, and some Beasts.
• St. Hellen Few Houses, but several Cliffs, Mountains, and Valleys: The chief known, Church-Valley, and Apple-Dale; but without Inhabitants.
• Cape Verd, or Salt Islands
  • Ilha del Sal A small River, and a little Haven.
  • Boavista In a maner unknown, further than sight; onely one River falls into the Sea.
  • Mayo Some Mountains, one handsom Plain, and a dangerous Road for Ships.
  • St. Jago Towns Praya, St. Jago, the Metropolis of all these Islands, and a Bishops See, surrounded with two little Rivers.
  • Del Fogo One Castle, and several burning Mountains.
  • Del Brava Neither Town nor Village, onely one Haven, above which stands an Hermitage.
  • St. Nicholas Two Havens, viz. Porto de Berguera, and Fuoor Fole.
  • St. Lucy One Harbor, but within very Hilly.
  • St. Vincent Many high Mountains; a convenient Bay, but dangerous to come to, and little fresh Water.
  • St. Antonio Two high Mountains; one Village, containing about 50 Families, and in the whole about 500 Inhabitants.
• Gorce No Rivers or Brooks; only two Forts, held by the Hollanders.
• Canary I∣lands are
  • Grand Ca∣nary Towns The Metropolis of the whole, a Bishops See; besides Galdar and Guya, with many dispersed Cloysters
  • Fuertaventure Towns Lanagla, Tarafalo, and Pozo Negro.
  • Lanecrotte Towns Cayas.
  • Teneriffe Towns Sancta Cruz, Lagana, Ortom, and Garrico. The famous Mountain call'd the Pike of Ten〈7 letters〉〈7 letters〉
  • Gomere, Palma Both without Inhabitants.
  • Ferro Some Towns, and a little Water.
  • Holy Haven Altogether void of People.
• Madera Towns Funzal, Manchico.
• Malta Towns Valetta, Citta Vecchia, or Old Malta; Burgo St. Angelo, or Citta Vittoriosa, and the Town of St. Michael, besides 60 good Villages.
• Comin, and Cominot. Onely one Fort.
• Goze, or Gozo One Castle, and a good Fort, and about 5000 Inhabitants.
• Lampadowze Altogether desolate.
• Linose Lies desolate.
• Pantalaree Towns Pantalaree. An Abyss call'd Fossa.

AN EXACT DESCRIPTION OF THE AFRICAN ISLANDS: AS Madagascar, or Saint Laurence, Saint Thomas, the Canary-Islands, Cape de Verd, Malta, and others.

With their Names, Scituations, Cities, Rivers, Plants, Beasts, Manners, Habits, Languages, Riches, Religions, and Dominions.

AFter the Description of the Main Land of Africa, the Subjected Islands belonging to the same, must be taken notice of; and they are found partly in the Atlantick Ocean; partly in the Mid-Land; and partly in the Red-Sea.

The Isles in the Atlantick, on the East of Africa, are these; Zokotora, Madagascar, or St. Laurence, the greatest of all; Nossihibrahim, or St. Mary; Bouebon, or Maskarenhas, or Maskareign; Almirante, St. Francis; As Sete Jemanas, Os tres Irmanas, Roque Piz, do Natal, do Arko; Don John of Miz, Pemba, Monfia, Zanzibar, Anisa, Quezimba, Mozambike, Don John of Castro, Cosmoldo, As doze Ilbeos, John da Novo, Ilhas Primuras, Angoxas, Galaga, Comoro, or Thieves Island, Alio∣la, St. Spirito, St. Christophano, Mazare dos Gorajos, St. Brandaon, St. Apolonu, Mauri∣tius, or do Ciene, Diego Rois, John of Lixbon, dos Romaros, dos Castellianos: By the Cape of Good Hope lieth the Island St. Elizabeth, Korwli, or Robben, and Dassen Island: South-Westward from the Cape of Good Hope, lieth the Island of Tristano Kunha; but more Southerly are the Islands dos Pikos, Martyn Vaz, St. Maria de Agosta, de Trinitad, Ascension, St. Helen, New St. Helen, Annoban, St. Thome, Rolletjes, Princes Island, Carakombo, Ferdinando do Po, St. Matthias, Ferdinand Noronho, Penedo de St. Paulo, the Salt or Cape de vard Islands, the Canary Islands, the Islands of Boro∣don, Madera, Porto Santo.

The Islands in the Mediterrane; are Galatha, Tabarka, Pantalerce, Malta, Goze, &c. In the Red-Sea, Primeiras, Delacca, Masuan, Magot, Mirt, Suachen, &c.

But here we must observe, that some of these being close by the Main Land of Africa, are already describ'd in the foregoing part; such be Zokotora, Quirim∣ba, Zanzibar, Mozambike, Robben and Dassen Islands, Corisco; the Islands Amboises, Bisegos, De los Idolos, Bravas, &c.

The Island of MADAGASCAR, or St. LAURENCE.

THe Island, commonly by Geographers call'd Madagascar, and in the Countrey Language Madecase; by Theuck, Albazgra; by the Persians and Arabians, Sazandib; by the Portuguese, Ilha de sam Lourengo, from the first Discoverer Laurence Almeide, Son of Francois Almeide, Viceroy of the East-Indies for the King of Portugal; who in the Year Fifteen hundred and six, put with eight Ships, first of all into this Island of St. Laurence.

Gaspar de St. Bernardino, in his Journey through India by Land, affirms, That in the Year Fifteen hundred and eight (with whom agrees Damianas de Goez) it was discover'd on the outside, and a little afterwards, the inside scarifi'd by one Ruy Pircira de Kontinho; and afterwards by Tristano da Kunha, who Sail'd quite round it, upon the Command of Alfonso d' Albuquerque.

There are that report this Island was known to the Antients, * 1.1 and that Pliny call'd it Cerne; Ptolomy, Menuthias; and Diodorus, The Island of Merchant Jol: but this cannot be, because they never had any knowledge of the Countreys lying Southward above Serre-Lions.

It spreads in length North North-East, * 1.2 and South South-West, Southward of the Equinoctial Line; and begins with its North end from the eleventh or twelfth degree and odd minutes; or according to Pyrad, from the fourteenth degree, and ends with its South end in the six and twentieth; that is, from the Cape of St. Sebastian, to the Cape of St. Mary. Linschot places it a hundred six and twenty Leagues from Cabo das Corinthas, on the Main Coast of Africa; a hundred and ten from Sofala; and four and forty from Mozambike.

It is one of the greatest Islands in the World; for the length from South to North hath been reckon'd to twelve hundred Spanish, or two hundred Dutch Miles; though Linschot says two hundred and twenty, the breadth seventy, and the Circumference nine hundred.

The Sea between the Island and the Main Land, towards that side of the Cape of Good Hope, sets with a strong Current, and goeth with a mighty Tide of Eb∣bing and Flowing; making a Channel at the Westerly entrance, eighty five Miles broad; and in the middle, where it is narrower, over against the Island Mosambike, four and forty Dutch Miles; but it grows wider again towards the East. The Ships which go from Europe to the Indies, and from thence back again, Sail commonly through this Channel, unless Storms and Tempests force them to Steer another course.

This Island hath been Canton'd into many Divisions, * 1.3 whose names we will endeavor to give you; viz. Anossi, or Karkanossi, Manatensi, or Manapani, the Val∣ley of Amboulle, the Countrey of Vohitsbang, Itomampo, Ikondre, Vattemahon, Manam∣boule,

[illustration]

INSVLA S. LAVRENTII, vulgo MADAGASCAR

Anachimonssi, Gringdrane, Vohitsanghombe, Manakargha, Matatane, Antainare, Ga∣lemboulou, Tametavi, Sahaveh, Vouloulou, Andouvoche, Manghabei, Adcimoi, Mandrerci, Ampatre, Karemboule, Mahafalle, Houlouve, Siveh, Ivoronheok, and Machicore. All large Territories, but the biggest is Machikore, being seventy French Miles long, and forty broad; and the most populous are Vohitsanghombe, and Erindrane.

We will give you a particular account of each, with what is remarkable therein: Beginning first with Carkanossi, and from thence will run up North∣ward to the Bay of Antongil; so turn back to the South, from Carkanossi to the River Ongelahe.

To the Northward of this great Island, two or three smaller, as Nosey Ibra∣him, or Abraham's Isle, by the French nam'd St. Mary; and another to the South, call'd Maskarenhas, or Maskareigne, and by the French, Bouchon.

The whole Coast of this Island on the East-side, * 1.4 spreads due North North-East, and South South-West, that is, from the Cape of Itapere, otherwise call'd Fitorah, in five and twenty degrees, and six minutes South-Latitude, to the Bay or Inlet of Antongil; and from thence to the Lands-end due North, from the Cape of Itapere to the Island of Karenboule, Westerly.

From Karemboule to the Mouth of the River Sakalite, the Coast runs North-West, and from thence to the seventeenth degree South-Latitude, North North-East; and thence to the fourteenth degree, being the Road of the Island due North.

The whole extent comprehends many beneficial and large Rivers, that ha∣ving their heads within the Land, irrigate the same to a rich fecundity, and at last emit their Waters into the Sea; by which means there appear divers fine Bays, which make convenient and safe Roads for Ships.

The South-side from the Cape of Itapere to Karemboule, the People of Europe best know; by most of whom frequented, but especially by the French, who have to the chief Bay assign'd the Name of Dauphin, from a neighboring Fort by them Built on the Land: But the Inhabitants call it Tolonghare, scituate between two Points, the one call'd Itapere, in five and twenty degrees, and thirty minutes South-Latitude; and the other the Point of Dauphin-Bay, in five and twenty de∣grees and ten minutes.

Next follows the Inlet of Ranoufouthi, by the Portuguese call'd, The Bay of the Gallions; there, The Bay of Karemboule, thirty Miles from the Fort of Dauphin.

On the South Point you find but one known Bay, to which the Hollanders have given the name of Sun-Bay.

The discovery of the places at the Sea Coast, from the Point of Antongill South∣erly, to the Bay of St. Augustine, the French ascribe to themselves; having since the Year One thousand six hundred and forty, settled and Fortifi'd in the Territory of Carkanossi, on the Southside, and there Built the beforemention'd Fort Dauphin; thereby commanding the Inland parts from the Countrey of Vohitsanghombe, in nineteen degrees South-Latitude, to the South end of the Island; comprising the Dominions of Vohitsanghombe, Gringdrane, Anachimoussi, Matatam, Antaware, or Mananzary, Ambohitsmene, Ehall, Emboulou, the little Isle Nossi, Hibrahim, or St. Ma∣ry Maskareigne, the Territory of Lamanouf, Ivourbon, Itomampo, Anamboule, Ikondre, Albssak, the Grape Island, the Valley of Amboulle, the Lordship of Anossi, or An∣drobeizaha, Ampatre, Karemboule, Machikoeo, Mahalle, Ivoronheok, Houlouwe, and Siveth.

The Portuguese in the Year Fifteen hundred and six, put in for this Island in their Voyages to the East-Indies, and discover'd many places near the Sea, and after them the Hollanders; but neither of them penetrated so far as the French.

The Territory of ANOSSI, or CARKANOSSI, otherwise ANDROBEIZAHA.

THis Territory lying in five and twenty degrees and eighteen minutes, * 1.5 extending from Manatengha, to the River Mandrerey, in twenty six degrees.

Many Rivers have their passage through it, * 1.6 as Franshere, Akondre, Imanhal, Ma∣nambatori, Manghafia, Harougazarak, Fautak, and Sama; most of which pay their Tributary Waters to Franshere.

This River, * 1.7 otherwise call'd Ravenatte, or Imours, takes original out of the Mountain of Manghare, in five and twenty degrees and eighteen minutes South-Latitude, two small miles from Fort Dauphin, falling into the Sea; having first receiv'd the Water of many small Brooks, as Akondre, Imanhal, Manamboaa, Andra∣voulle, and some other.

The Water of this River, about a mile up in the Countrey, is always brack∣ish; and at the Mouth makes a Lake or Pool call'd Ambove, of a large half mile broad, and deep enough to bear a Ship.

It feeds many Crocodiles, as all the other Rivers of this Island.

Half a mile from the Mouth of Franshere, lieth Cape St. Romain, so nam'd by the French; but by the Blacks, Rancratte, or Hehohale, which shews six or seven Leagues into the Sea from the North-West.

Next this Cape appears a great Creek, in form of a Cross, extending to the Point of the River call'd Dian Pansonge, or Fitorah; in the middle of Tolanghare, an Isle shews it self: to the Northward of which, you may see the Fort Dauphin, and behind that, the Haven of the same name.

From thence to Cape St. Romain, the Coast bears the name of Sivoure, from a Lake, made by five or six small Brooks meeting therein; which in time of great Rain, overflows the adjacent Grounds.

The other Point of Dauphin-Bay, is Cape Itapere; next which follows the Bay of Lonkar, in five and twenty degrees, affording a commodious and safe Harbor for Ships and other Vessels to Ride there; onely the coming in is dangerous, by reason of obscure Rocks.

Adjoyning to this lies the Island St. Clare, so styl'd by the French, being a small Spot before the Haven.

Then passing a little forward, you discover the River Manghafia, able to bear good Ships; at the Mouth being twenty four degrees and a half, and taking original out of the Mountain Siliva.

Half a mile North Westward, glides the small River Harangazavah; and a mile and a half further, that of Monambalou; famous for the Rocks lying in its Mouth.

This Territory hath many Islands, full of rich Meadows fit for the Pastu∣ring of Cattel; and the Countrey round about very fertile in the producing all sorts of Provision, yielding to the curious eye a pleasant Prospect, surrounded

with high Mountains, and Checker'd with fruitful Plains, beautifully varied with delightful and easie rising Summits.

By the Shore of the River Franshere, and the other Rivers, lie many Villages; the chiefest of which are, Franshere, Imanhal, Cokomabes, Andravoulle, Ambometanaba, Mazomamou, Imouze, Mazofoutouts, Hatare, and Fananghaa, besides a great number of others.

Eight Miles from Fort Dauphin, lies a Tract of Land call'd Vohitsmassian, * 1.8 that is, The Lucky Mountain, by which the Portuguese formerly had a Fort, with seve∣ral Dwellings below it, and Gardens with all sorts of Provisions, but were at last surpriz'd and massacred by the Natives.

Four Miles from the beforenam'd Fort, lies a naked Mountain and other neighboring Hills, oftentimes digg'd by the French, in hopes to find Gold or Silver; but chiefly by a place where seven clear Springs rise one by another, and make a Brook, wherein they found many Stones mixt with a Clay or yel∣low Earth, full of white and black Clods shining like Silver; but being beaten and cleans'd, was found too light.

Thirty Fathom above the Springs, the Grass and other Plants have chang'd their natural Verdure into a fading yellow, which proceeds from the sulphur∣ous Vapors of inclos'd Minerals; but on the top of the Mountain, all things re∣main fresh and green: They say the Portuguese formerly at the foot of this Mountain towards the North, by digging, found Gold; but since their extirpa∣tion, the Great ones of the Countrey have fill'd up the place.

This Territory comprehends two sorts of people, viz. Whites, and Blacks; the first subdivided into three Clans, nam'd Rohandrians, Anakandrians, and Onzatsi; the last distinguish themselves into four Tribes, that is, Voadziri, Lohavohits, Ont∣sea, and Ondeves: The Whites which have come hither within these last hundred and fifty years, name themselves Zafferahimini, from the Mother of Mahomet call'd Himina; or as others, the Stock of Ramini, whom they account their Predecessors; or from Ramnaina, Wife of Rahourod, Father of Rahari and Rakouvatsi.

The Rohandrians are those out of which they choose their King, whom they call Ompiandrian, or Dian Bahouache; the whole number of them being the chief Nobility, and reverenc'd as Princes.

The Anakandrians are extracted from the Nobles, but Illegitimate, or else sprung from a Rohandrian Man and Woman, either the Blacks, the Anakandrians, or the Onzatsi: Those they intitle Ontampassemaka, that is, People of the Sand of Mecha, from whence they say they are come with the Rohandrians. These Ana∣kandrians have a reddish Skin, and wear long Hair, Curl'd like the Rohandrians: both these have the priviledge to slaughter any Cattel.

The Onzatsi being the meanest, have their Extract from the Bastards of Ana∣kandrians, or else from the Race of the Sea-men, which the Zafferamini, or their Predecessors Dian Rakoube, or Rakouvatsi, brought into this Countrey. These are also red of Skin, with curl'd Hair, but may not kill any Creature but Hens. These are all Fishers.

These People have neither Religion nor Temples, * 1.9 but they use a Custom of Sacrificing some Beasts; when they are Sick, or when they Plant or gather Ig∣names and Rice, or Circumcise their Children, begin a War, enter into a new built House, or Bury their Relations: The first Fruits of Beasts they offer first to the Devil, and then to God; naming the Devil first, Diaubilis Aminnan-habare, as if they would say, Lord Devil with God. This Superstition they have in∣herited from their Fore-fathers that were Mahumetans, and blindly con∣tinued

therein by their Priests, or Ombiassa, great Cheaters and Liars.

The Blacks, in the Countrey Language call'd Oulon Mainthy, and Marinh, are of four sorts; Voadziri, Lohavohits, Ontsoa, and Ondeves.

The Voadziri, the greatest and richest, possessing some Villages, derive them∣selves from the first Progenitors of this Countrey, before the Whites, or Zaffe∣raminies came thither; but afterwards subjected by them. They have the Priviledge to cut the Cattels Throats, which belong to themselves or their Slaves, when they are far from the Zafferamini, or there be no Rohandrian or Ana∣kandrian in their Villages.

The Lohavohits are also Grandees amongst the Blacks, and Off-springs of the Voadziri; but the difference between them consists in this, That the former Commands over a Countrey, and the other scarce hath the Rule of a small Village. They may not (as some report) cut an Ox or Cows Throat, though they are his own; but must go and fetch an Rohandrian, or Anakandrian, to do it: Notwithstanding some of them have a thousand Head of Cattel.

The Ontsoa are under the Lohavohits, and their near Relations.

The Ondeves, the meanest of all (as their Name imports, Ondeve signifying A lost Man) are Slaves both by the Fathers and Mothers side, or else bought, or taken in the Wars. When the Anakandrians, Ondzatsi, or Voadziri, and Ontsoa, die, they can leave nothing to their Children, because the Grandees or Great ones under whose Jurisdiction they stand, take all; onely they possess the Ground to Plant on.

The Voadziri, Lohavohits, and Ontsoa, may at their pleasure submit themselves to some Great Lord, upon the Decease of their King; for which Submission they receive a Gift from the same Lord, which intitles him after they die, to inherit all they possess. The Ondeves dare not forsake their Masters, except it be in a time of dearth, or for hunger, and that he denies them Sustenance; in which Case they may freely go to other Masters.

The Countrey of Anossi is under the Jurisdiction of the French; but was Govern'd by the Zaffaramini, or Rahimine, before the French had taken it, under a Prince whom they honor not as a King, but as a God. He was call'd Andi∣an Ramach, and after this death succeeded by Andian Maroarive, who had been a Christian, Baptiz'd in Choa, brought up by the Jesuits, and kept by the Viceroy of Goa; till at length return'd to his Countrey, and deliver'd into the Hands of his Father Andian Thianban. He was well instructed in the Christian Religion, and could Read and Write after the European Fashion, spoke good Portuguese, and could give a Rational Account of his Faith; but as soon as he came to see his Father, he betook himself to his former Heathenism. He was kill'd by a Musket-Bullet at the Siege of the Village Franshere, by the French, where he had his abode.

The Fort of DAUPHIN in ANOSSI.

ON the outmost Point of the South-East side, close by the Shore, about the year Sixteen hundred forty four, the French began to strengthen themselves with a Fort, which (in Honor of their Kings Eldest Son) they entituled Dauphin; and to settle a Plantation of People, which brought

almost the whole Territory under their Subjection by force of Arms.

In the year Sixteen hundred forty two, a French Sea-Captain, nam'd Ricault, got leave and priviledge for himself and his Participants, of the Cardinal Richelieu, then Chief Supervisor of the French Affairs, That he might alone send Ships and People to this Island of Madagascar, and the adjacent Isles, to erect a Colony for Merchandizing there, for the benefit of Trade, and to take Pos∣session of the whole in the Name of the King of France. This being granted him for ten Years, with exclusion of all others, a Company was erected by the Undertakers, under the name of the East-India French Company; and shortly af∣ter the King augmented their Term unto the year Sixteen hundred sixty one.

In that Year, in the Moneth of March, the Company first sent out one Ship, under the Command of Captain Coquet, to fetch Ebony-wood: With him there were also sent two Commissioners, call'd Pronis and Foukenburgh, with twelve others, to remain there, and expect the coming of a Ship which should set out of France in November. Coquet landed about September; and in his Sailing by, he put in for the Islands of Maskarrigne and Diego de Rois, of which Pronis took pos∣session in the King's Name; then Sail'd over to St. Maries, and the Bay of Antongill, in the Countrey-Language call'd Manghabe, where they did the same: But Foukenburgh and Pronis remained in the Haven of St. Lucie, or Manghafia. The first of April the Ship St. Laurence arriv'd, being sent thither by the Compa∣ny, under the Command of Captain Giles Rozimont, whilst Captain Coquet was gone to seek a Lading in the Territory of Anossi and Matatane. Rozimont brought along with him seventy fresh Men from Pronis, which all fell sick, and so conti∣nued about a Moneth at Manghafia, a third part of which quickly died; where∣upon the Black Inhabitants made an Attempt upon the new-arriv'd French, but were bought off, with Presents given by Pronis to the Dian Ramach: Afterward Pronis sent twelve French to take their abode in the Territory of Mantane, at a Place call'd Mananzari, partly to Trade for Rice and other Provisions, and part∣ly to discover the Countrey: But in their going over a River, six of them were kill'd by Zare Ramehina, a near Relation to Dian Ramach: In like manner, in Bohitsmene six Sea-men of Captain Rozimont's, with his Son, were slain as they were loading of Ebony-wood.

Rozimont at last laded so much Ebony-wood as he could, and brought over the six other French to Anossi, to Pronis; for Pronis had in the mean while chang'd his Habitation, and was gone from St. Lucies, or Maghafia, to Anossi to take his Residence with all his People in Tholonghare Bay, near the before-mention'd Fort Dauphin; this place being by them judg'd the fittest and convenientest, partly for the commodiousness of the Haven, defended from the worst Winds, and partly for the easiness in coming to it, not only for Sloops, but also for Ships.

The Fort Dauphin lieth next the Bay of Tholangre, in five and twenty Degrees and six Minutes South Latitude, over against the Cape of Itapere, situate four Degrees higher.

Behind the Fort stand several Habitations, among which the House of the French Governor, with a great Garden, planted with all sorts of Pot-herbs and Fruits: But in the year Sixteen hundred fifty six, this Fort was burn'd down by accident; yet immediately rebuilt, and a good Garrison plac'd therein.

The French maintain great Wars against the Inhabitants of the neighboring Territories, marching into the Mountains, burning down their Huts and Vil∣lages, and taking away their Cattel.

In the year Sixteen hundred fifty one, Flacourd being then Commander in Chief for the French King, with forty French, and as many Negroes, arm'd with Shields and Lances, destroy'd the Countrey of Franhere, and laid all the Huts and Houses in Ashes, carrying away many Cows and Oxen, and both Men and Women; so that by this means all the Glory of the Roandrians came to nothing.

This cruel Usage rais'd in the Inhabitants a mortal hatred against the French; * 1.10 increased afterwards by the selling of some Men and Women Slaves, by their Governor Pronis, to the Netherland Governor of the Island Mauritius.

The Territory of MANATENGHA, or MANAMPANI, and the Valley of AMBOULLE.

THis Territory of Manatengha, or Manampani, so call'd from the great River of the same Name running through it, lieth in three and twen∣ty Degrees South Latitude, being a very delightful spot of Land.

A little more to the Northward, at the Mouth of the foresaid River, the Val∣ley of Amboulle shews it self.

This River, * 1.11 lying with its Mouth under the Tropick of Capricorn, takes its original out of the Valley of Amboulle, and receiveth out of the Mountains En∣calida, Hiela, and Manghaze, additional Streams, sending its Current afterwards into the East.

In the Valley of Amboulle, stands a great Town also call'd Amboulle.

This Valley produceth many wholesome Roots and Plants, especially white Ignames, and Sesamos, whereof the Inhabitants make Oyl, which they call Menaehil.

They have very good and fat Oxen and Cows, besides some considerable Mines of Iron.

Near the Town Amboulle rises a Hot Bath, whose Water they have reported to bear a heat sufficient to boyl an Egg hard in four and twenty hours; and by the Inhabitants accounted a powerful Remedy against the Gout or Sciatica.

The Natives employ their time in Forgeing and Making Asagayes, * 1.12 Lances, or Darts, and other neat Iron-work.

The People of Amboulle are Govern'd by a Voadziri, that is, A great Lord, call'd Rabertau, being rich in Cattel, and all necessary Provision of Victual: But his Authority seems small; for upon a scarcity of Provision, his Subjects will tumultuously force him to supply their Wants: But afterwards, when the Crop in the Field comes to be cut, he repays himself four-fold.

All the People of this Valley live in so great liberty, that their Countrey is a Refuge and Shelter for all Rogues and Vagabonds.

Westward of Amboulle lieth Izame; * 1.13 a small place, but rich in Iron-Mines, and Menachil, or Oyl of Sesamos.

The Inhabitants, being about eight hundred, are the most undaunted and Warlike of the whole Island, yielding Obedience to a Voadziri, related in Blood to the forsaid Robertau.

VOHITSBANG.

THe Territory of Vohitsbang reacheth from the River Manatengha, in three and twenty Degrees and a half, to the River Mananghare, and Bor∣ders upon Anradsahock, and Fangaterre, containing within it a Lordship call'd Manacaronha, lying at the River Mambondrou.

This Countrey boasts several Rivers; as, first, Manatengha, * 1.14 which with four Mouthes, viz. Vinangadsimo, Manamaza, Sagandacan, and Vinangavarats, pours it self into the Sea: D' Aviboule; by the French call'd St. Giles, four French Miles from Manatengha: D' Andraghinta, two Miles higher: Sandrivinangha, a Mile fur∣ther, issuing out of the Mountain of Viboullo: Monambondrou, three or four Miles from thence: Massianash, fifteen French Miles from Aviboulle, where they find a good Bay for Barques, by the French call'd Ance de Borgne, that is, The crooked Bay. Four Miles more Northerly lies Mananghare, which hath seven Mouthes, but all stopp'd up with great Rocky Cliffs. It cometh out of Ito∣mampo, lying towards the West; but augmented by three other fair Rivers, Janghainou, Itamampou, and Mangharak; all which, uniting with this, lose their Names.

This Coast, from the River Manhafia to Sandravinangha, stands inviron'd with the high Mountains of Viboulle, full of Woods, Dates, and Honey, and afford∣ing some Gold: And indeed the whole Tract, though very Mountainous, yet produces abundance of Honey, Oxen, Sugar-canes, Ignames, Rice, and other Provisions for Food, besides many Iron Mines.

The Inhabitants are all Black of Colour, * 1.15 with bushy curl'd Hair upon their Heads; living in a perpetuated Contention, upon ancient Feuds, or old Quarrels, * 1.16 intayl'd both to Memory and Revenge from the Parents to the Chil∣dren. They are so great Thieves, that sometimes they will take away the Chil∣dren and Slaves of their Neighbors, and nearest Kindred in Blood, to carry and sell them in far distant Places.

They have an innate Enmity to the Zafferamini, as believing, That by their Skill in Writing certain Characters, they can bewitch, bring Sicknesses upon, and at last kill them. At the Mouthes of Manatengha live none but Om∣pizees, or poor Fisher-men.

They make their Clothes for the most part of peelings of Trees, * 1.17 which they call Fautastranou, and Avo; or else they buy Cotton Clothes in Carnossi or Ampatre.

Their Arms are Wooden Shields, cover'd with an Oxes Hide, * 1.18 and an heavy Assagay, or Lance.

They have as many Governors, as Townships; * 1.19 but none of them have any Religion: yet they eat no Swines Flesh by Custom, and are Circumcis'd.

The Dominions of ITOMAMPO, IKONDRE, VATTEMANAHON, MANAMBOULE, and ANACHIMOUSSI.

ITomampo lieth in a Valley surrounded with high Mountains, * 1.20 about three small Miles in compass, where they Forge excellent Steel.

Ikondre, * 1.21 a small and Hilly Countrey, in twenty two Degrees and thirty Minutes South Latitude, stands in the East and East-North-East divided by high Mountains from Itomampo, and borders in the South upon Vattemanahon, and Michicore; and on the North and North-West, touches Manamboule.

Vattemanahon borders East and North-East-wards on Ikondre, * 1.22 and on the Head-springs of the River Itomampo, and Madreri; West and South, on the Countrey of Machicore. It appears a wild Countrey, having been laid waste in the Wars.

Manamboule hath Limits in the East and East-North-East on the River Ito∣mampo; * 1.23 in the North, on Anachimoussi; in the West, at Alfissack; in the South, on the great Mountains, where the River Jonglahe takes its Rise, from thence running Westwards from Mozambike, into the Sea.

Anachimoussi, * 1.24 a Tract of about four small days Journey in length, abutteth in the East at the River Jonghaivou, which cuts it through the middle; in the South, on Manamboule; in the West, on the great Mountains; in the North, on the River Mangharak, and the Lordship of Eringdrane.

Several Rivers glide through and water these Countreys, * 1.25 viz. Itomampo, Jong∣hainou, Morqua, and Mangharak.

Itomampo moystens and gives name to a small Province, which it passes quite through, streaming down out of the Mountain of Viboulle, and shooting from thence into a Dominion call'd Houdra, lying above that of Inouchon, by the River Mananghara.

The River Jonghainou, that is, The Middle River, flows out of the Mountains of Ikondre, and divides Manamboule from Anachimoussi: Afterwards takes its Course Northerly, and then turns into the West, a days Journey from Itomampo, thence flowing directly West one days Journey, it unites with Manharak, a small Mile lower; both which joyning with Itomampo, make the great Stream Mananghare, which runs East and South-East eight great days Journey, and at last through seven Mouthes, falls into the Sea.

Maropia, a Branch of Itomampo, passes into Mandrarei.

Mangharak waters the North side of Anachimoussi.

The Soil of Itomampo yields great store of Rice, * 1.26 Ignames, Sugar-Canes, Corn, and Cattel: Anachimoussi, and Manamboule, though Mountainous, yet complain of no want, hiding within its Bowels good Mines of excellent Iron: Onely Wood is wanting, which they fetch from the Mountains.

The Voadziri of Manamboule, nam'd Dian Panahahe, is become terrible to his Neighbors, against whom he makes continual Wars, at the Instigation, and by the Assistance of the French.

ERINGDRANE, and VOHITS∣ANGHOMBE.

THe Province of Eringdrane is on the East inviron'd with great Moun∣tains, which divide it from Antavare and Ambohits-mene: * 1.27 It hath in the West three great Rivers, which discharge their Waters into a large Bay; Situate in twenty Degrees South Latitude, to the side of Mozambike. This Countrey is divided into the Great and Small: The Less, water'd by Mangharak, lieth to the South; and Great Eringdrane, towards the North: Out of whose Mountains issues the River Mangharak, from a Head-spring rising in twenty Degrees and a half; from whence, after a long Course, it unites with another call'd Jonghaivou.

Vohits-anghombe, parted from Eringdrane by the River Mansiatre, * 1.28 hath on the North the Lordship of Anciarakte; on the East, that of Saharez, in nineteen Degrees and a half South Latitude, and the high Mountains of Ambohits-mene; and Westward, the Mozambike Sea.

The River Mansiatre, being very great, takes its Original out of Eringdrane, * 1.29 in the height of eighteen Degrees; so passing between that, and Vohits-anghombe, falls into the fore-mention'd Bay, in twenty Degrees.

This Countrey abounds with People, and can, if Occasion requires, raise above thirty thousand Men; as Vohits-anghombe, an hundred thousand.

The Mountains on the East side are full of Cattel, and the Villages beau∣tified with handsom Buildings. The People make two sorts of Clothes; one of the Thred of the Banana's Tree, almost as fine as Silk; the other of pure Silk: both which they sell at reasonable rates. They are naturally inclin'd to quarrel their Neighbors, with whom they live in continual Feuds; grown more imperious, by the Assistance receiv'd upon all Essays from the French.

The Territory of MANAKARONGHA, and MATATANE.

BOth these Countreys lie between the Rivers Mananghara and Mananzari, on the Sea-coast; touching in the West on the Mountains which divide Anachimoussi and Eringdrane.

The River Mananghara consists of a Confluence of other meeting Waters; * 1.30 as Itomampo, Outhaivon, and Mangharak; which last intermingles with the Ocean through seven Mouthes, as before-mention'd, every one lying about four French Miles from another, and known by the Names of Kaloumanga, Maninghi∣vou, Mananbatou, Mananpatran, Oughamiri, Mananfingha, and Rentofou.

At the River Matatane lies the Territory so call'd: * 1.31 This River hath its Ori∣ginal from the Mountains of Vattebei, and enters the Sea by two Out-lets, di∣stant from each other seven French Miles, with pleasant Fields between.

The Land hereabouts lies plain and even, producing Sugar-Canes, Honey,

Ignames, and Cattel, and well water'd with many Streams, replete with Fish: From these Canes an extraordinary profit might be gained, if the people were instructed and fitted with Materials to Extract and Boil the Sugar.

The great men have to the number of fifteen or twenty Women, which live apart in a separate place, surrounded with Hedges, where every one hath a small House to dwell in, into which they dare let none enter, upon forfeiture of their lives.

They have neither Mosques nor Churches, * 1.32 yet give themselves over wholly to Superstition, and Sorcery, as an effect thereof, giving credit to Charmes and Characters written after the Arabian fashion, which they call Hiridri, Masarabou, and Talissimou. They imagine some of these able to prevent Thunder, Rain, Wind, and Wounds gotten in the Wars; and likewise as Preservatives against Poyson; good Defences against Robbing, and Burning of their Houses and Vil∣lages; in short, infallible Remedies against all Misfortunes. All these Charms the Ombiassen, a Gallimaufry of Priests, Astrologers, and Southsayers, make and sell to the meaner sort of Blacks, which wear the same about their Necks, and sew'd in their Girdles. They cut the same Characters also on Gold, Silver, and small flat pieces of Reed for the same purpose.

The Inhabitants are two sorts, Zaffekasimambou, or Casimambou, the chiefest; and Zafferahmina, both Whites, but the first more deform'd, although generally Priests, and Learned-men.

About thirty or five and thirty years ago, all the Zafferahimina were kill'd, except Women and Children; to whom the Conquerors gave some Islands and Fields to Inhabit; on which they Planted and fed their Cattel, and are ever since call'd Ontampassemaci, which is to say, People of the Sand of Mecha, because they are Arabians of the Red-Sea.

The Casimambou put in for this Island (by their own relation) by the directi∣ons and Command of the Califf of Mecha, to instruct the Islanders in Mahomets Superstition, about a hundred and sixty years ago: At which time, their Chief Governor Married the Daughter of a great Lord, and Prince of Matatam, a Ne∣gro; with condition, that her Issue, Male or Female, should be call'd after his Daughters name Casimambou, as is usual on the South side of this Island, and al∣so in Mactricore.

The Zaffekasimombou are mightily increas'd in number, and teach to Read and Write Arabick, keeping Schools in all the Villages for the Youth.

The Ontampassimaci live by Fishing, wherein they employ their whole time; and have arriv'd to a wonderful dexterity therein.

Next the River Matatam lie along the Sea Coast many others; as Manghasiouts, Manangkare, Mananhane, Itin, Itapaulobei, Itapoulosirire, and Itapaulomaint-hiranou, Fo∣nara, Lomahorik, or Morombei, and the Mantaraven.

Manghasiouts, or Manghasies, is an indifferent River, three small Miles from Matatam; on whose Shore the French have a Factory, but dangerous to come to with a Boat, by reason of the Rocks and Shelves that clog it.

Four Miles from thence passeth the River Mananghan.

The Mananhare, which signifies much Provision; abounds with Fish.

Intin, a Mile and a half from thence; but a small Pool.

The Itapoulobei, Itapolousirire, and Itapaulomain-thairanou, are three small Rivers, lying two Miles distant from each other, and take their original out of the neighboring Mountains.

The Faroan, three Miles from the Itapaulominthiranou, is a great River, and Na∣vigable for a Bark; on whose Banks the Whites of Manouffi have seated them∣selves.

Lamohorik, or Morombei, three small Miles from Faraon, comes out of the High-Land, six or seven Miles towards the West.

Manataraven a small River, lieth about six Miles from Morombei.

The Territory of Antavare, Manouffi, and Vobitsmene.

NOrthward of Matatane followeth Antavare, scituate in one and twenty degrees and an half South-Latitude, and extending to the Cape Ma∣nouffi; delightfully Water'd by the Mananzau, a large and fair River, issuing from the steep Ascents of Ambohitsmene; or the Mountains lying North and by East.

The Territory of Manouffi, reacheth from the Cape of the same denomi∣nation, to the River Mananghourou: fifteen Miles more Northerly, between which Cape and River, lie three other Rivers, Andredi, Tenasatamamou, and Ten∣tamimi.

Antavane produces plenty of Rice, Ignames, Bananoes, Sugar-Canes, Honey, Oxen, Goats, with all sorts of Fowl and Victual.

The Territory of Ambohitsmene lieth North and by West from Antavare, and takes name from the aforesaid high Red Mountain, in nineteen degrees and a half, or twenty South-Latitude; which may be seen fifteen Leagues off at Sea, resembling Table-Mount, at the Cape of Good Hope.

This ledge of Hills runs fifteen French Miles to the In-land; between which and the Sea the Land appears very low, Marshy, and full of Lakes; among which one of above fifteen Miles long and broad.

Upon these Mountains, the people of Famantara, have Zaffarahong for their place of Residence; which place abounds with Gold, Iron, Cattel, Rice, Sugar-Canes, Ignames, Silk Clothes, and other Necessaries.

Twelve Miles from Mananghorou, Avibaha enters the Sea; * 1.33 being (perhaps) an Out-let of the aforesaid Lake.

Three Miles from thence, the River Tsatsack and three other, Foutchurao, and a Mile and half onward, Ivorhon pours down into a Bay, by the Inhabitants call'd Tametavi; but by the French Mariners, Port aux prunes, that is, Plumb-Haven.

The Territory from Tametavi to the Bay of An∣tongil, that is, to the Countrey of Voulou∣lou, the Long-Point, the Lordship of Andouvoulhe, with the Bay of Manghabei, or Antongil.

THese Countreys begin at the Haven of Tametavi, or Plumb-Haven, lying in eight degrees and a half, and spreading by the Sea Coast to the Bay of Antongil; in the Language of the Countrey call'd Manghabei, in fif∣teen degrees South-Latitude; to the Land-wards inclos'd with the Mountains of Vohits-anghombe, and Ansianach.

After the Plumb-Haven they have four small Rivers, Fautack, Faha, Faho, and Maroharats, distant a small mile each from another: After that Anacchinquets, making a deep Haven, with a good Sandy bottom; but open to the North-East East, and South-East Winds.

Three small Miles Northerly, * 1.34 you discover Longue-Point. The Countrey about moisten'd by the River Voulouilou.

Five Miles further, * 1.35 lieth the great River Ambato; famous for the Rocks and obscure Cliffs, but never comes to the Ocean.

Two small Miles more Northerly, you come to Galemboulou, in seventeen de∣grees and an half; a large receptacle for Barks, but very dangerous, because of the blind Rocks and boisterousness of the Sea: near which stands a Town call'd Ratsimelone, but by the French Mariners St. Mala.

Three Miles from Galemboulou, a very fair and great River pours its self into the Sea; wherein they say the small Island Ambouluossi shews it self.

The River Manangharou running from West to East, * 1.36 divides its self near the Sea Coast into four distinct Channels; of which it self being one, retains its name from the Original to the Mouth: The other three are, Manansatran, the second Marinhou, opposite to the Island Nosti Ibrahim, or St. Mary; and lastly, the Stream Jamiami, a great and spacious River, which at its Outlet into the Sea, al∣ways holds seven or eight Foot Water.

After this followeth the River Mananghare, fronting the North Point of the Island St. Mary, and the South Point of Antongil Bay; entring the Sea with so commodious an opening, * 1.37 that a great Bark may easily come in or out.

Following along the Western Coast, the Countrey of Andouvouche cometh to view, that is, The Bay; but because of the many other, as Antongil, by the Inha∣bitants formerly call'd Manghabei, for Antongil is a Portugal name, proceeding from a Portuguese Sea-Captain, Antonio Gillo who discover'd it.

It lieth in fifteen degrees South-Latitude, stretching Northward, and about six Miles broad. In the deepest part of the Bay lieth an Island very high out of the Water, two large miles about delightfully green, fruitful in all sorts of Provision; compleatly stor'd with fresh Water, Hens, Honey, and Bananoes: Seamen esteem it a most convenient refreshing place.

At the entrance of the Bay, are three or four other small Islands, either Sown with Rice, or full of Weeds.

On the North side, are three populous Towns, with several other along the Shore; neighbor'd by a great River, which divided into two Arms, the one running to the North, the other to the West; making in the middle at the parting an Island.

Further on to the North appears another great Town, call'd by the Portuguese St. Angelo, surrounded with a strong Pallisado: Opposite to which on the left hand another, which the Netherlanders in their first Voyage to the East-Indies, in the Year Fifteen hundred ninety five named Spakenburgh, consisting of about a hundred and eighty Houses: West South-West from the foremention'd Island, glides another River, upon which a Town lieth.

The Grounds are exceeding good and fat, well water'd, and full of Grass, * 1.38 but not over-stockt with Cattel, the richest Person having scarce a Herd of four and twenty Beasts.

The Towns here shew more of Architecture than usual in these parts, and advantageously Seated, either upon the Mountains, or along the River, Fen∣ced with Stakes; with two Entrances or Doors, onely the one to the Water, the other to the side of a Wood, for their flight thither, when set upon by the Enemy and worsted.

All the People from the Plum-Haven to Antongil-Bay, * 1.39 observe the same Cu∣stoms, and all name themselves one among another, Zaffehibrahim, that is, The Generation of Abraham; or Nossi Abrahim, from the Island Abraham, whence they are sprung.

By their keeping holy the Saturday, their whiteness of colour, and some other particular Customs, Flaccourt thinks them to be descended from the Stock of the Jews and Arabians, who fled thither many years ago.

Both Men, Women, and Children are whiter than those of Matatane and An∣drobeisaha, with smooth Hair hanging down at length; being good natur'd, mild, and hospitable, not inclin'd to Robbery or Murther.

In Dancing and Singing, they seem to use some kinds of measures; Footing it in pairs, sometimes making distinct stops, and stretching out their Arms.

All their Songs consist of Epithalamiums; in the Chanting whereof they use odd Postures, and all the by-standers keep time by clapping of hands, which they call Manghovah, that is, Keeping, as if they should say they would keep time.

Men and Women, when they have any sickness in their Eyes or Head, they anoint their Faces, sometimes with white, sometimes with black, red or yellow Colours: But old Women use that kind of Painting to make them seem the more lively and youthful.

The Women and Maids have an observant and strict eye held over them, so that a man cannot without difficulty be permitted access to them.

They are very diligent in Husbandry: In the morning before Sun-rise, * 1.40 go∣ing to the Rice-Fields, from whence they return not till Sun-set.

The Men cut up Canes, call'd by the Indians, Bambu, and here Voulou, which being dry'd they set on fire, and then lay the ashes as Compost upon the ground to inrich it; after that the Women and Girles set the Rice, Grain by Grain, making a hole in the Earth with a Stick, into which the Grain being cast, they fill it up.

The Seed-time (as we may call it) being over, they sever the Rice from the Weeds, and carry the ripe Corn from the Field into the Barns. In the mean time, while the Women are busie at their labour, the Men begin in other pla∣ces

to cut up and burn; for as soon as they see the first Sown Rice come up, they set another Crop immediately; so that they continually labour, and have the whole year through Rice in the Leaf, in the Blossom, and in the Ear. The same they do with all other Dressings and Plantings.

Here you must take notice, that the Canes or Bambu beforemention'd, in burning makes so great a noise, that may be heard at a great distance, as if a multitude of Ordnance, Muskets, and Pistols were shot off together.

The Merchandize which the French sell to the Galemboulle, * 1.41 serveth them not for Ornament or wearing, but they keep it up as a Treasure, and buy Cattel with it in the Countrey of Ansianackte and the Mountains of Ambohitsmene.

They find little Gold among those of Galemboulle, but some quantities of Sil∣ver, and that reddish, course, and unrefin'd, or of a base allay.

These people, * 1.42 and all the Zaffehibrahims, keep the Saturday holy, as we hin∣ted before. They do not acknowledge Mahomet, but call all the Mahumetans, Caf∣fers: they reverence Noah, Abraham, Moses, and David, but take no notice of the other Prophets, nor of Christ, and hold Circumcision. They observe no Fasts, nor have any Law or Worship, neither know what it is to pray to God, though nevertheless they offer Sacrifices of Oxen, Cows, and Goats. They have no Temples, or other places of Worship or Assembly, but Amounouques or Burying-places of their Fore-fathers, to whose memory they shew great reverence; by all which, they seem to have some little Reliques of Judaism. They are so great∣ly addicted to their own Customs, that they will rather die of hunger, than eat of a Beast or Fowl kill'd by any Christian, or one of the Southern Coast.

All the Children born on a Tuesday, Thursday, or Fryday, they bring into the Woods, and lay down as untimely Fruits, for to perish by cold or hunger, or be devour'd by the wild Beasts; although sometime by one or other of the Wo∣men, out of tenderness and compassion, taken up and suckled.

Every Village hath a peculiar Lord, * 1.43 in the Countrey Language call'd Fi∣loubei, who administers Justice to the People; and the eldest takes upon him as a Judge to decide all differences. They assist and aid one another in the Wars, but if any of the Filoubei quarrel, all the rest interpose as Mediators, who take up and moderate the Controversie; but if they will not hearken, they leave them to decide it by Arms, sitting neutral Spectators.

These people use their Slaves more like Children than what they are, inso∣much that they esteem them as Sons, admitting them to eat at their Tables, and not seldom bestowing their Daughters upon them for Wives.

The Hollanders have formerly frequented this Bay, to buy Rice and Slaves; and some years ago began to grow numerous, till the unwholesomness of the Air kill'd many; and the Lords of the Countrey, either by open force, or clan∣destine practises, weary'd out and destroy'd the rest.

This is all that hitherto could be known concerning this Island, at the South East and East side; for from the Bay of Antongil to the North end, little disco∣very hath yet been made by the people of Europe; onely we have heard of a Territory call'd Vohemaro, and in the Portugal Sea-Cards set down by the name of Boamaro, inhabited by White People. According to the relation of a Gold∣smith, whose Ancestors were the off-springs of Vohemaro. In this Territory much Gold hath been found.

On the East Coast of this Jurisdiction, appears the Bay of Vohemaro, or Boa∣maro, lying in South-Latitude.

It remains yet, that we describe the Coast and the adjacent Countreys lying at the Mouth of the River Franshere, as you pass to the West and North, to the Bay of Zonghelabe; so call'd by the Inhabitants, but by the Europeans St. Augu∣stin, and Mansiatre.

The Coast of the Territory of Carcanossi, to the River Mandreri.

BEyond the Mouth of the River Franshere, to the Cape of Monkale, lieth a San∣dy way of four great French Leagues; and from thence to the Bay of Ra∣noifoutchy, otherwise call'd the Bay of the Galliones, two Leagues. Upon this Sandy Coast stand some Bushes between two Lakes, call'd, The Pools of Ambouve; upon whose more fertiliz'd Banks grows abundance of Aloes, in the Countrey phrase named Tetech.

Beyond Monkale, and Ranoifoutchi you pass through a way call'd Mozambike; but the chiefest Village call'd Italy.

The Bay of Ranoifoutchi hath a good coming in for a Bark or Sloop, but not for a great Ship; it lieth open to the South and South-East Winds: the worst that blow in these Countreys, never arising but accompany'd with Thunder and Tempests.

Five Miles from thence glides the River Mandreri, upon whose Banks they make abundance of Salt, with little labor and cost.

The Soil here cannot produce Rice, by reason of the two much Sandiness, but Cotton they have in abundance, and Oil made of the Plant Ricinus, good for many sicknesses, and other uses.

Ever since four hundred and twelve, the Portuguese had at the Bay a Habi∣tation, under a Captain of their own, call'd Macinorbei by the Natives, but by the Portuguese Miosignor; with the addition of the word Bei, that is, Lord.

The Territory of Ampatre, Mananghare, and Caremboule.

AMpatre, hath in the East the Territory of Carcanossi, with the River Man∣dreri, between both it spreads in length by the Coast twenty French Miles; in the breadth twelve, from the Sea to Machicore. The Coun∣trey within hath neither Rivers nor Water, onely by chance some Ditches or Ponds, yet boasts an exceeding fertility, being full of Wood, with which the Inhabitants erect their Villages, surrounded with Poles and Thorns, so that it is impossible to come into them, but through the Gates.

The Natives addict themselves extraordinarily to Robbing and Pillaging of their Neighbors, not onely of Goods, but also of their Wives; for which rea∣son great Feuds arise amongst them, which oftentimes break into an open Hostility.

This Province can bring three thousand men into the Field.

Every Village here (as in the former) hath a Lord; amongst which one hath the preheminence of Command over the other.

The River of Mandrery, parting Carcanosse and Ampatra, glides very swift, but lies for the most part stopt up. It takes original out of the same Mountain with that of Itomampo, and falls at the last by the South into the Sea.

Many Rivers bring hither their tributary Streams, as Maropia, taking his course by Icondre; Manamaboulle and Mananghare: Manamboulle descending from the Mountain Hiela, and Mananghare issuing from the same on the South-west side.

Mananghare is inhabited with a People so unaccustom'd to War, that every Great Man appropriates his Neighbors Countreys to himself, as if he were the rightful Owner: whereupon none will either Till or Manure the Land, but let it lie waste, and become a shelter for wild Hogs and Oxen.

The Mountain Hiela towres up with a lofty heighth, sending from its sides the River Manampani. This Hill boasts a great number of Inhabitants, and di∣vides the Valley of Amboulle, Machicore, and the Carcanossi, one from another: Westward of which last appears a Territory call'd Encalidan; between which also and the Valley Amboulle, a small Tract, styl'd Caracarack.

Caremboulle, * 1.44 a small Countrey, about six Miles in length, and three or four in breadth, borders in the South, on the Sea; Westwards, on the Bay of Carem∣boulle; and East, at Ampatre, where also the River Manambouve gives it a limit.

The River Manambouve hath a full Stream, about thirty French Miles from that of Mandrerey, beginning in Machicore, and running to Caremboulle, a Course of fifteen or twenty Miles.

Twenty French Miles Westward, the small Rivulet Manamba joyns with the Sea.

Menerandre, another small River, two Miles from Manamba, poures down out of Machicore, and runs South-South-west.

Four Miles from that are two other little Brooks, that fetch their original out of a small adjacent Mountain.

The Coast of Caremboulle, the outermost South-side of Madagascar, stretcheth East and West; but beginneth from the River Manamba, to run North-west to that of Manerandre, and from thence to Manamba and Machicore.

The Land of Caremboulle is dry and parched, yet hath some few good Pa∣stures stock'd with Cattel.

In Ampatre grows abundance of Cotton, whereof they make Clothes, and some Silk.

The Territory of Mahafalle, Houlouve, Siveh, and Youronhehok.

MAhafalle, seated farther to the West with the Sea-coast, reacheth to the Salt-River, call'd in Portuguese, Sacalite, about fifteen French Miles from Manomba and Hachicore.

This River, lying in five and twenty Degrees South-Latitude, cometh out of the Region of Houlouve, beginning at the Mouth of the said Sacalite, and shooteth into the Countrey two days Journey.

Siveh runneth along the Sea-coast about four Miles in length.

After Siveh followeth Youronhehok, wherein appears the Bay of St. Augustine.

Yonglahe, a great River, receiveth on its North-side, * 1.45 besides many petty Brooks, the Water of three larger Streams, viz. Ranoumanathi, Ongehahemassei, and Sacamare. It riseth out of the Mountain of Manamboulle, and runs to the West, having its outlet Southerly into the Sea by a very fair Bay, call'd by the Portuguese, St. Augustine, but by the Inhabitants, Ongelahe. It lieth in three and twenty Degrees South-Latitude, defended from hurtful Winds, and from the South to the North-west passable for great Ships; yet hath some Cliffs ly∣ing on both sides, dangerous for their coming in.

On the South-side of the Bay, the French have erected a Fort resembling four small Bulwarks, surrounded with Stakes, or Pallisado's, and a Trench of three Fathom broad, and two Foot deep in Water; having on one side a Way in the Trench above ten Foot broad, by which they enter into the Fort.

About the Year Sixteen hundred forty and four, the English Landed here four hundred Men; but near three hundred, with the Captain, dy'd by the Feverish malignity of the Air and Hunger: at last the remainder were deliver'd from the jaws of Death, by means of a Ship that Touched at this Place, and carry'd them from thence: for all usually in their Voyages to the East-Indies make some stay here, for refreshing, and bring their Sick there to Land, to recover their health.

The Territory of Machicore.

THe Territory of Machicore, a great Countrey, stretcheth the whole length of the River Yonghelahe, that is, East-North-East, and West-South-west, seventy French Miles; and the like difference from East to West; but from the North to the South, not above fifty, that is, from the aforesaid Ri∣ver to Ampatre and Mahafalle, but lies utterly waste.

This Province, as also those of Concha, Manamboulle, Alfissach, and Mahafalle, stood formerly under the Government of one Lord, call'd Dian Balonalen, that is, Master of a hundred thousand Parks: Then was the whole in Peace, and flou∣rished in happiness and Riches, even to excess. But after the death of Balonalen, who left several Sons, they fell into Wars for the Inheritance in such a mea∣sure, that they were all extirpated.

From Onghelahe right Northwards, appear two great Rivers, the one call'd Ranoumanithi, spoken of before, and Ranoumene, which comes out of Anachimoussi, and poures its Water in two and twenty Degrees South-Latitude, into a Bay near the Sea; and a third less, known by the name of Ranoumanithi, running towards the West-South-west into a Bay, in twenty Degrees South-Latitude.

This Countrey the Portuguese call Terra del Gada, that is, The Countrey of Cattel, from the vast Herds thereof breeding in it.

There are three other Rivers run towards the West, the one Sohavianh; the other Soumada; and the third, Manatangh, all flowing into a great Bay, in nine∣teen Degrees.

Higher to the Northward the French have hitherto little knowledge of this Island; and the Portuguese have for these many years discover'd all upon the Sea-coast, except some few Places, as the Countrey, or Bay of Paxel, of St. An∣drew,

Cabo di Donna nostra Cunha, Rio de St. Andreas, Rio de Diego Soares, and lastly the Cape of St. Sebastian, the uttermost North-west Point of this Island.

We will proceed now to give you some account of the general state of the Island.

They find Iron and Steel in great abundance, which they work and cleanse with more ease and less labour than with us; for the Smiths take a Basket full of the Mineral, as they find it ready, and lay it upon red hot Coals between four Stones, set and closed about with Clay, and blown up with a pair of Bellows made in manner of a Wooden Pump; with which blowing, the Mineral within an hours time melts, and so drawn off and for∣ced into Bars, or Staves of three or four pound.

There are also, as they say, Mynes of Steel in the Territories of Mahafalle, Anachimoussi, Inourhon, Icondrean, Manamboulle; and in Amboulle, Anossi, Matatane, and Manghabei, good Iron. Silver is very common in these Countreys; yet hath none ever found there any Mynes either of Silver, Copper, Lead, or Tin.

They find Gold also among the Inhabitants, * 1.46 not brought thither to them, but found every where in great plenty, and such as the Europeans have none of; they call it in their Countrey Language Voulamene Voutruroa, yet distinguish it into three sorts; the first their In-land Gold, or Gold of Malacasse, pale∣colour'd, and is pliable as Lead; an Ounce whereof is not worth ten Crowns. The second, Gold of Mecha, or Voulameneraca, which the Rohandrians brought with them out of their Countrey, it being very fine, and good Duckat-Gold. The third, that which the Christians have brought thither, being hardest to be melted, and by them is nam'd Voulamene Voutrouwa, as they say. The Gold of Malacasse was first found in the Countrey, of which there are Mynes in the Ter∣ritory of Anossi, and elsewhere, by the relation of the Blacks. The In-land Gold they divide into three sorts; one very fine, call'd Litteharonghe; the second less fine, styl'd Voulamene Sautehy; and a third ordinary, nam'd Ahets-Lovau.

Precious Stones they find in the Rivers and Brooks of many kinds, * 1.47 as Cry∣stal, Topazes, Granats, Amethysts, Eagles-stones, Smaragdines, or Emerauds, Saphyres, Jacinths, Jaspers, Agats, Blood-stones, (by the Inhabitants call'd Rahamanghe, and by the Physitians in Greek, Haematifes) Cornelion, Toad-stones, and such like.

They find in several quarters of this Island divers sorts of Waters, * 1.48 some run∣ning above, and some under Ground, receiving a taste and quality according to the Mineral they participate of.

In the Valley of Amboulle ariseth a Spring with very hot Water, a powerful Medicine against Sicknesses growing from Cold in the Sinews: the same being drunk is a great Pectoral, and cures all Diseases of the Stomach, openeth ob∣structions in the Reins and Spleen, and expells the Stone and Gravel.

They have in many places Springs that taste like Iron; as near Fort Dauphin in Anossi, which the French and the Blacks therefore call the Iron-water.

In a high Mountain in Amboulle are Fountains of salt Water (although thir∣ty Miles distant from the Sea,) whereof the Natives make Salt.

Manghasia shews a Fountain upon a Hill, out of which issues Jews-Gumme. In the Precinct of Fanghaterre, Westward of Mount Hiela, are Brooks with white Water, that taste and smell like Brimstone.

Houlouve, * 1.49 and Vourouhehock, afford rich Salt-Petre Caves; which they name in general Tentele, and make-four sorts of it; Bee-Honey, call'd Voatentele; green

Mesquite-Honey, by name Sih; and two sorts of Honey of Pismires, one of Fly∣ing Pismires, Swarming together in hollow Trees; and of other Pismires a little bigger, which make their Honey in Vontantames, that is, great Mole-hills sharp and copped above, every where boared through with Ant-holes. All these Honeys have a very sweet taste.

But besides these, they tell of two other sorts of Honey; one hard and sweet, more resembling Sugar than Honey, yet call'd Teutele Sacondre, made of the Leaves of a little Tree or Shrub, which at maturity turn into yellow, green, and red Husks; some hold this to be the Tabaxir of the Arabians, or Sugar of the Bomboes Cane, which yields rather an unpleasant than sweet taste.

There is yet another sort of Honey, said to be Venomous or Poysonous, yet made by Bees which suck it out of the Flowers of a Tree, bearing strong Poy∣son, and found in Carakarak, a member of Anossi.

The Inhabitants make three sorts of Wine; the first and commonest, of Ho∣ney; the second of Sugar, which they call Tovach, or Tovapare, being somewhat bitter of taste like new Beer, or as the Kernel of an Apricock, made in the Countreys of Manamboule, Matatane, and Hanghabei, by boyling the Sugar Canes in Water to the consumption of a third part, then putting it into great Calla∣bashes, it becomes Wine on the third day. This Wine hath such a corrosive qua∣lity, that put it into an Egg-shell, it will eat the same throrow in the space of one hour.

The third, some make of the great Bananoes Fruits, putting the same into a Vessel, and boyling it four or five hours, of which cometh a tartish Wine like Sider.

They have several sorts of Oil, * 1.50 with which both Men and Women anoint their Heads and Bodies; for want thereof they take Ox Suet mixt with Wax. The best known and ordinariest Oils are, Menachtanhe, (Menaen signifieth Oil) Menachil, Menachovivat, Monachmafoutra, Menach Voarave, Menach Apokopouk, Menach Vintag, and Menach Arame.

Menach Tanhetanhe made of a Plant, in the Countrey Language call'd Tanhe∣tanha; and by us, Tree of Wonder; and in Latin Ricinus; Minalchis Oil they make in the Valley of Amboulle, of a Fruit or Seed call'd Voankare; and in Europe, Sesamus: Menachouvivou they extract of a Fruit as big as an Almond, and hath a good taste both in Eating and Drinking: Menachmafoutra made of the Kernels of the Fruits of the Dragon-Tree; bears the same thickness as Oil of Nutmegs, but without smell; it cures Scabs, and dry Tetters: Voarave is drawn from the Fruit Fontsi: Menachfowaha, of the Fruit Apokapouk, being very Poysonous: Menach Vintag, of a great Acron: Menach Arame, of the Kernel of the Fruit of the Tree, from whence the Gum call'd Tacamahacha proceeds.

From hence Merchants bring divers sorts of Physical Earth, one red, (Tamene in their Speech) as good, if not the same with that, by the Apothecaries call'd Bole Armoniack: another call'd, Terra Sigillata, Sealed Earth; that properly so named, brought from the Island of Lemnos, and therefore also call'd Terra Lem∣nia; yet according to Flakourt, that of Madagascar, no less esteem'd than the other, and among the Natives call'd Tavelisse. A third like Chalk, excellent to wash Linen in stead of Sope, being a fat Clay, like the Earth of Malta; which they say, carry'd about one, hath power to kill or drive away Snakes or Serpents, or at least, to resist their Poyson; the Vulgar name there is Tanefoutchi.

They have great variety of Gums, known by the general name Lite; some well scented, and others without any smell: Of these we will reckon first Lite∣menta,

or Benjoin, Literame, or Taccamahacca: Lite Fimpi, a pleasant scented Gum. Lite-Enfouraha, a kind of green Rosin, with a Balsom-like smell: Quizominthi, a black Gum, which serves to Glue the Handles to their Assagays: Hingue, a black well scented Gum: Litimithsi, black like Jah; very drawing, but quick∣ly grows dry and hard; yet the Women use it to Gum their Faces, to prevent Wrinkles; it heals also Wounds and Sores. Litin Bitsik, Gum made by the Pis∣mires in the Territory of Ampatre; is white, and hangs on a small Branch of a Tree, inclosing within it small Pismires: Falanoue, that is, Musk, cometh from a Creature as big as a Cat: Litineha is our Dragons Bloods: Litin Barenko∣ko, another sort of Dragons Blood: Latinpane, well scented Rosin, of the Tree Fane: Vahonlitintang, the Sap or Juice of the Tree, Vintang, or Aloe: Litingharon∣ga, a yellow Gum, like Gutta Gambu, coming from a Tree, out of whose Blos∣soms the Bees gather a delicious Honey.

Nature hath also stor'd this Island with many kinds of Plants, as well for Food as Physick; as first the nutrimental are these:

Rice of two sorts, the one call'd in the Countrey phrase Varemanghe, and the other Vatomandre: The first being of four sorts, two of them are Bearded and very white; the other two sorts Bearded, with a red Shell, that turns russet when it is boyl'd.

The Rice Vatomandre grows never but in Winter; is smaller than the other, and sowrish of taste.

The Rice Varehondre, differenc'd onely by the name.

Another sort of Rice, call'd from Varemanghe, because Planted in the Sum∣mer to be Reaped in the Winter, yields not so much as the other; neither is it Planted, but in a scarcity of other Rice, or when the Grashoppers or Locusts have eaten up the former Crop.

There they have divers sorts of Ignamoe Roots, * 1.51 which they all call with the general name of Ouvi, that is to say, Ouviharen, Soabei, Kambares, Ouvifouthi, Offe∣qua, Mauondre, Valeue, Randre, and Damborn. The Ouifoutchi are the best and dear∣est; after these follow the Soabei, which are white; then the Kambares, some of a Pink colour, and some white; very acceptable in the taste. The Ouifoutchi grow very big in fat ground, some to the thickness of a mans middle, which being hang'd on a Pole, two Negros have enough to do to carry: but the or∣dinary ones are as thick as a mans Leg, whereof a hundred, or a hundred and fifty, buy an Ox: The Soabei are not half so great: The Kambares and Ouvihare are of one bigness, and a hundred and fifty given for a hundred Ouifoutchi. One piece of the Ouifantochi planted in the ground, produces sometimes two others, but commonly but one; but one piece of the Kambares and Ouvihare produces commonly three or four others: The Ouvihare are the smallest and cheapest, yet well tasted, and flourish better than the rest; whereof the Slaves make their best repasts.

The Root Offeque, also a sort of Ignames, or Ouvi, hath a bitter taste, which therefore the Islanders steep and boyl to take away the acerbitie before they sell it. The Negros are very desirous of them, insomuch, that after they have boyl'd them as before, they dry them in the Sun, till they grow as hard as Wood, that they may keep them a year or two without spoiling or rot∣ting.

The Mavandre, a pleasant tasted Root, whereof one hath commonly ten or twelve distinctions, but no bigger than a Hens Egg, somewhat resemble Ches∣nuts, but mellower, and hurtful to the Stomach.

The Valeue, differs little from the Soabei and Oviharen.

There are besides these Planted several other, which grow of themselves; as Ouvi-enpasso, Ouvi-randre, Ouvi-dambou, Fanghits, Vahalaye, Fandre, Hombouk, and others, which in time of Famine are sought for in the Fields and Woods.

The Ouvi-enpasso are very thick and long Roots, and as pleasant to be eaten when they are ripe as the Carembares; they grow in the Woods by the Sea side.

The Ouvi-randres are small Roots, of the thickness of a Raddish, with a long Leaf, growing in Pools.

The Ouvi-dambou is a Root, whose Leaves are like those of a Vine, very un∣pleasing, and hard of digestion; so that they seldom eat it but in the time of Famine.

Vohalaye grows as thick as a mans head, with an ash-colour'd Shell; and is eaten both raw and boyl'd.

Fanghits, are Roots with a Rosie colour'd outside, and exceeding large; very sweet of taste, but not so acceptable as the Vahalaye: They satisfie both hunger and thirst, are eaten raw, being of easie concoction, expelling watry humors; they grow under Thorn Hedges.

The Roots Fandre and Hombouk, are well tasted, and taken for good Food by the Ompilamyces and Ompeerees, which neither Sow nor Plant.

Sonres have round Leaves, so broad, that a man may stand under and shel∣ter himself from Rain: These Leaves with Meat eat like Cabbage; but the Root tastes as well as the Pulp in the Stalk of a Artichoke.

Houmines, or Voamitsa, resemble a Turnip, one Plant will yield in a year above a hundred Roots.

They have three sorts of Water-Lillies, with Pink, White, and Yellow Flow∣ers; the Roots of all which are eaten boyl'd and roasted, as we use Chesnuts. The Root of the Pink-colour'd, call'd Fantamou, give a very sweet relish, which both men and Women feed on with great appetite, as a strong Provocation to Venus; whereas the Root of the White, or Lazelaze; and the Yellow, Talifouk, prevents and hinders Love affairs.

Geirst or Ampembe, grows there to the height of a Pike, and is ripe in June. * 1.52

Voangbe are small Beans, which both green and ripe have a pleasing savour, but lie heavy in the Stomach; being Sown in June, they grow ripe in three Moneths.

Voandsourou, are small Pease, no bigger than Tares.

Antah, a sort of good Roman Beans.

Voandre, another sort of Beans, but bearing their Fruits under ground, having in each Husk onely one Bean: Perhaps the Arachidna of Theophrastus; the Leaves sit by threes, like those of Clover-Grass, but without other Branches or Stalks than those of the Leaves.

Varuattes, otherwise Ambarvatsi, is a Tree like the Spanish Caper-tree, and blos∣soms in the same manner, bearing a Cod or Husk, in which lieth inclos'd a small and well tasted Grain: It grows to the heighth of a Cherty Tree, and some give the Leaves to Silk Worms to feed on.

There grow also in many places Bananasses, some larger, and some less, ac∣counted good Victuals; and when ripe, eaten roasted like Apples; many times they gather the green and unripe Branches, which hang'd in the roofs of their Houses, ripen in five or six days. In Eringdrane they make Thred of the Bark of this Tree, to be worn into Clothes.

Akondre a small Fruit, whereof one Bush bears above a hundred, and whe∣ther young or old, they are of a green colour, but the Root esteem'd the best Food.

Ananassen, by the Islanders of St. Mary, and the Bay of Antongil, call'd Manassi, grow there in great abundance; but those on the Islands are better than by the Fort of Dauphin.

Water-Melons, with them call'd Voamanghe, are of two sorts, one with black, and the other with red Kernels, but both of them very good to abate thirst.

Likewise Vontanges, or Musk-Melons, like our Citrons, but neither of these are natural Products; the Seed being first of all brought thither from France.

Voatane are of two sorts, long and round; the long, though not fully ripe, they boyl and eat with Milk and other Victuals, but the dry'd ones serve them for Flasks.

Sugar-Canes, call'd Fare, grow there almost without number, especially in Matatane, Manamboulle, Antavare, Ghalemboule, and the Island of St. Mary; of which much Sugar might be made, if the Inhabitants understood that Art; but they extract a strong Wine of them, at the first not very pleasing, nor will it remain good above three days; and besides, hath such a corroding quality, that being kept from Morning to Evening in a Stone Cup, it will eat the same thorow; which the strongest Juyce of Lemon cannot do.

Vanto grows upon a thick Tree at the Sea side; which being ripe, the In∣habitants either eat alone, or with Milk and Salt. The Wood of it proves ve∣ry firm, and fit for Building.

Vantaka, a Fruit as big as an ordinary Apple, hath a hard Shell, within full of flat Kernels, whose ripe and pulpy substance, pleases two Senses, the Taste, and the Smelling, though green, contrary to both; and besides hurtful to the Stomach. This Fruit, Garzias calls the Queen-Apple; and K. Durant, Marmelos de Bengala, whereof they say a Liquor may be made like Beer, but causing a Flux of the Belly.

Voarots is a Fruit of a great Tree, with Leaves like those of an Olive, very sowre, and as big as a Cherry, with a black Shell like a Nut, of which there are three sorts, white, red, and black.

Voaverone, a Pink-colour'd Fruit, very sweet and acceptable to the Palate. In Dying it gives a tincture of Black and Violet.

Voahelats, a kind of Mulberry, in the likeness both of Leaves and Fruit, but so sharp and sowre of taste, that it fetches the skin off from the Tongue.

Azorualala, a small red Fruit, well tasted, thick, like a red Mulberry, but not juicy, grows on small Trees under Hedges.

Voatsoutre, a small thick Fruit, like a Nutmeg, but relishes when boyl'd or roasted like a Chesnut.

Tacanhoca, a Fruit which causes Dogs to die. The Tree whereon they grow shoots up very high, and hath Wood exceeding hard, of a Mouse-colour: The Leaves resemble those of the Almond-Tree, but indented with five or six cuts, at each of which grows a Flower of the same colour, but without Scent, which afterward changes into a Fruit that stands round about the edges of the Leaves.

Voanane, a Fruit half a Foot long, and proves a powerful Medicine against a Loosness.

Ensasacale, the Fruit of a great Tree, shooting up very streight, with few

Branches, is long like that of the Pipe Cassia, and so divided into small Partiti∣ons; the colour without and within yellow, full of Seed, and containing some well-scented Juice; it grows neither on the Branches nor Leaves, but on the Bark, round about the body of the Tree, from the top to the bottom, and is of three sorts, viz. first the foremention'd, then are other blacker above, and the third of an ash-colour'd white.

Fonti, otherwise Dourou, shoots up like a Plume of Feathers, with Leaves re∣sembling Falls a Foot long, and two Foot broad; some more.

The Fruit Voatfonsi, or Voadourou, grows like the Date, or Bananos-Trees, but in a hard Shell; every Grain resembles a great Pease, cover'd about with blew Skin; of which they make Oyl, as the Meal of it they eat with Milk. This Fruit, with the Leaves of Retel, and a little Chalk, the Inhabitants conti∣nually chew for their healths sake, and to preserve a sweet Breath. The dry Leaves they call Rattes; the Stalks, Falaffes; and use them about their Houses, because they will keep six years without decaying. The green Leaves serve them for Mats, Trenchers, and Drinking-Cups.

Hamouton resembles and tastes like a black Plum, but hath no Stone, but in stead thereof ten or twelve Kernels; by the French call'd (from the abun∣dance of the Fruit there growing on the Haven) Le Pourt aux Prunes, that is, Plum-Haven. There is another sort of Alamoutou, call'd Issaye, like great Sloes, but hath the taste of Figs, with some small Kernels within. The over-eating of this Fruit breeds a pain in the Stomach.

Sweet and sowre Granates, call'd Voacomani, grow ripe in November and Octo∣ber: Also small Oranges, nam'd Voang Hissaye, of a sweet taste, and no bigger than a Plum, and hang ten or twelve on a Stalk.

Citrons, by a general name call'd Vousara, are of seven sorts; some sweet, and very large, which they call Vousa-remami; another ordinary sort, call'd Voasecats, sowre and small like a Plum; two other taste like a Mussle-plum, and are denominated Voatoulong, the one are great, and the other small; ano∣ther Voutrimon, with a thick Shell, grows to the bigness of a Childs Head: The Shell of this and the Voatoulong is good to preserve.

Ravensara is a great and high Tree like a Lawrel, and with such Leaves, but less.

The Fruit Varvensara resembles a green Walnut, but tastes (as well the Shell as Kernel and Leaves) like a Clove. The Tree bears no Fruit till the third year; and when the Inhabitants desire to have these Fruits and Leaves (which they boyl with Ginger, Garlick, and Fish,) they climb not up the Tree, but cut it down by the Roots: it grows on high Mountains, and there are Males and Females of them.

Right white Pepper may be had there in such abundance, that a great Ships Lading might be carry'd from them every year; it comes to maturity in Au∣gust, September, and October.

Cardamoms also grow towards the side of the Territory of Galemboulou, and are in the Countrey Language call'd Longouze, otherwise Melegette, and Grain, having a black Seed, yielding a Spicy taste.

Likewise very good Ginger call'd Sacaviro, but according to Flaccourt, not in any great quantities; though Francis Couche affirms that it grows all over the Island, and that the Islanders Plant that alone round about their Houses to catch the Rain falling on its Branches; and likewise about the Hives for a Food to the Bees. There grows yet another sort on the Mountains,

call'd Sacaviro d' Ambou, that is, Mountain of Ginger, taken by Flaccourt for Zedoary.

Coco-Nut, by them call'd Vianiou, are very scarce, and were not known to them in former times; but as they were brought from other Places, since the Year Fifty or Sixty, and that by chance many were thrown up by the Sea on the Shore, which is not without great probability, because from time to time there are Coco-Nuts found on the Sea-shore.

Moreover Indian-Saffron, there in the Countrey call'd Tametavee, and by Linschot in Malays, Cunhet, and Curcuma. The Root is like to that of Ginger, yellow in the in-side, and tastes like it, but not so sharp.

Voutzere grows on a middle-siz'd Tree, with broad Leaves, being as big as an Egg, with much Juice within, like a Coco-Nut: The dry part is good to eat; and of the Leaves the Inhabitants make Mats, Ropes, and Baskets.

Achith is a certain sort of Vine, with round and indented Leaves, remaining always green, and never falling off, bearing Fruit call'd Vouchits, of the bigness of a green Grape, and ripe in October, January, and February.

Anboutou, a small Herb, proportion'd as our Flax, but somewhat rank of taste, and bitterish. The Inhabitants chew this Herb to colour the Gums, Teeth and Lips black, and to perfume their Breath. It strengthens much, and therefore in times of Famine they eat it to corroborate the Vitals.

Lengou grows upon a creeping Plant, in bigness like a Nut, with many cor∣ners: The taste comes near that of a green Walnut. They chew the Shell, for the same reason as the former.

Zemale, a meer stinking Weed; yet used by the Inhabitants to the same pur∣pose with the two before-going, and also to cure the Scurvey, and Rotting Teeth.

There grows also the Herb which the Indians call Betell, or Bethree; the Ara∣bians, Tamboul; but the Madagascars, Tamboure; which they continually chew with a little Chalk; but in the Territory of Matatane, with a Fruit call'd Fou∣ronfourau, which is the Indian Areka.

Banghets, by the Indians call'd Anil, and Enger, is a Plant of which they make Indico, in this manner. They put a great quantity of this Plant, cut off, with Leaves and Stalks, when it begins to blossom, into a Tub of Water, and every day stir it about with a Stick: When it is rotten, which is commonly in three or four days, they cleanse it from all Dross and Stalks; and the Water, which hath receiv'd a dark Violet-colour, they let through a hole in the bottom, in∣to another Tub, after it hath been well stirr'd: Into this Water, so drawn off, they put a proportion of Oyl-Olive, and then beat it strongly together, to mix it: Then they let it stand till the Colour settles down to the bottom, and the Water parts it self from it; which they draw off, till at last there remains no∣thing but this Mud, being the right Indico: Then they lay it on a great Stone in the Shade to dry, keeping all Soil from it.

Fanshaa, a Tree whose Wood is strip'd, and very hard; grows high, and af∣fords, if cut round about, a blackish Liquor.

Ravier, a Plant with Leaves almost half a yard long, and broad, like those of the Aloe, but not so thick; serving to cover the Huts with, and are call'd Fandre.

Latakanghommelahe, the Fruit of a spreading Plant, with white Flowers, that smell like Jasmine, but are much bigger.

Singofau, is a great Leaf, three Handfuls long, and four Fingers broad, grow∣ing

on a Plant, which winds it self round the Body of a Tree, like Ivy. The Leaf, beaten and rubb'd into the Eyes, clears the Sight.

Rhomba, an Herb with great Leaves, grows about a yard high, and smells like Cloves or Cinnamon: It seems a sort of Balsom.

They have along the Water-side and Ditches much Eastern Cyprus, which they call Movita, and use it against the pain of the Head.

Tongue is an Herb like our Saponarie, with a Flower like Jesamine, but a bitter Root, very good against the pain of the Heart, and Poyson. They shew two sorts of it; one with white Leaves, being the most powerful; the other with purple.

Anramatiko, a Plant of two yards high, bearing on the top of the Leaves, being an Hand-long, a hollow Flower, and Fruit. They are of two sorts; one with red, and another with yellow Flowers. The Inhabitants dare not pluck these Flowers, alledging, That whosoever plucks them as he passeth along, shall never want Rain; Which the French have found untrue.

Voame are small red Pease, growing on a little low Plant; by the Gold∣smiths in that Countrey used to sodder Gold with, in stead of Borax, which they know not. They use it by mixing the pownded or beaten Pease with the Juyce of Lemons, and wet the Gold therein, which by that means grows tough and forgeable. The Indians in Malaya call these Pease Konduri; and the Javanars, Saga, using the same in stead of Weights.

Fiomouts, otherwise Voulibohits, is an Herb bearing yellow Flowers, and thick Leaves, which the Women apply to any part to take away Hair. The green Herb, which smells like Melilot, they burn to Ashes, and make into a Lixiviate Liquor.

Fimpi, in bigness represents the Olive-Tree, with an Ash-colour'd Bark, of a sharper taste than Pepper: Flaccourt taketh it for the Indian Costus. The Bark dried in the Sun like Cinnamon, turns white, and smells fragrantly, either burn'd, or unburn'd. The Wood is very white, hard, and strong-scented: The Leaves have the same smell as the Bark.

The Tree Tetech, by the ancient Greek Druggists call'd Agollachum, and Xilo∣aloe, that is, Aloe-wood; and by the Portuguese, Paodaquilla, grows there also, to the Height of an Olive-Tree, with Leaves somewhat larger than those of the great Myrthus; but being bruised cause sneezing.

Madrise is a Tree with small Leaves, speckl'd Wood outwardly, but in the Heart bears a Violet-colour.

Hazon Mainthi, or Black Wood, is a great Tree from whence the Ebony-wood cometh, being the Heart of the Body: It hath but small Leaves, like those of the Myrthus, and of a dark green; and the Bark appears blackish. There are three or four sorts of them.

Anokouts bears a Fruit a Finger long, but not so thick; of a dark Ash-colour, with Leaves like those of a Pear-Tree. The Juyce of the Fruit put into new Milk, converts it into Cream.

Tendrokosses bears a Fruit like Haws.

Tarantalle is a sort of Box-wood.

Sanzene Lake, and Sanzene Vane, are a Wood smelling almost like Cummin∣seed, but much stronger. The Inhabitants use this Wood against Fevers and Agues, and cure with it all green Wounds, being rubb'd with Water on a Stone. That which they call Sanzene Vane is the best.

Enkafatrahe smells like Rose-wood; 'tis us'd against the pain of the Heart, being rubb'd on a Stone with Water, and laid on the Breast.

Mera hath Leaves like the Olive-Tree, with unscented yellow Wood, as hard as Box.

Vintang, a Tree of which the Inhabitants make their Canoos, because the Worms never get into it: There issues from it a Gum, very good for the curing of Wounds.

Azonorouts, a fine Wood, and good to make Combs of.

Tamboubitsi is a Plant whose Wood resembles that of the Orange-Tree.

Fatra bears Benzoin.

Sandraha, a very high and straight Tree, of a blacker Wood than Ebony, without any Knots, and when planted, as smooth as Horn. In Ranoutfoutchy, and about it, grow great store of them.

Kokambe, another black Wood, like Sandraha, but crookeder, grows on Stony Places, is very full of Prickles, and hath few Leaves: The Blossoms smell very pleasant, and likewise the Wood laid on the Fire makes a delicate Perfume.

Envilasse, another sort of Ebony-wood, like the former, but more knotty.

Zaa, a tough Wood, of which the Hilts or Handles of the Lances are made.

Tambourecissa bears Apples, which in the ripening open themselves into four parts: They are within full of Kernels, cover'd with a thin Orangy Peel, which affords a Dye like the American Fruit Rokou.

Anakau, or Anako, resembles the Cypress-Tree, and grows at the Water side.

Asonpassehis brings forth a Fruit well-tasted, and is as big as a Date-Tree.

Vahats, a small Tree, whose Bark at the Root is onely serviceable for Dying. From the fresh Root the Rhind comes off very easily, being moisten'd with Wa∣ter; but from the dry Root it must be taken with a Bone-Knife. When they will use the same in Dying, they hang it, together with the Silk or Wooll, to boyl over a small Fire, with a Lixivium of the Ashes of the Bark, which gives a Fiery-Red Colour; by adding to which a little Juyce of Lemon, it turns into a beautiful Yellow.

The Plant Anghive is of two sorts; a greater, and a smaller. The small pro∣duces a Fruit in bigness like a Goosberry; but the biggest grow as large as a Hen-Egg, being of a Scarlet colour, and a good taste. The Scum of the Root is good against the Gravel.

Andian Bouloha grows along the Sea-side, with Leaves like those of Dog∣grass.

Varaukoko, a Plant winding it self about great Trees, bears a Violet-colour'd Fruit, as big as a Peach; sweet and good of taste, but mealy, with four great Kernels within. Of the Wood they make Hoops for Pails and Tubs; but they rot in a Years time. Out of the Bark drops a red Gum, like Blood. The middlemost Bark, being indifferent thick, smells (if held in the Candle) like Gum-Lac, and hath almost one and the same smatch.

Rhaa, in this Countrey call'd the Dragon-Tree, from the shape of that Creature, which the Fruit doth represent under the Shell, (which Flaccourt doth positive∣ly deny, having, as he saith, open'd several) grows to the height of a Nut-Tree, and yields Blood out of the Bark, Boughs, and Body, when cut; from whence this Tree hath gotten its Name; for Rhaa signifies Blood: and the Blood is as red as that of a Man or Beast, being the same which commonly the Apothecaries call Dragons Blood.

The Wood looks white, but subject to decay in a short time; The Leaves are like those of the Pear-Tree, but a little longer shap'd: The Elowers as red as Fire, and long: The Fruit, call'd here Mafoutra, or Voafoutra; and by Dodoneus and others, Dragonall, hath the bigness of a small Pear, and the same shape, onely thicker at the Stalk. Within lies a Stone, cover'd with a single Skin, containing a Kernel of the same colour, and almost in smell like a Nut∣meg. There are three sorts of this Tree, each of which produceth a several Fruit. From the Kernel of the Fruit they extract a thick and fat Oyl, a pow∣erful Medicine against Burnings, Itches, and Tetters, and effectually operates upon all Pains. The Scum of the Bark cures the Bloody-Flux.

Lalanda is a kind of Jesamin, and grows to the height of a small Tree, with Leaves like our European Jesamin, and a very sweet smelling Flower, which the Women lay to steep in the Oyl of Sesamos and Menachil.

Honnits Ankazon, a small Tree, bearing a Flower of smell like the Jesamin, but much larger and whiter, with a white Stalk of above six Inches long.

Voale, a small Plant, bearing an ordinary Blossom.

Langhare grows commonly amongst Thorns, with long carv'd Leaves, like those of the Chessnut, but much harder, and somewhat sharper at the ends. The Body of it rises very straight: The Blossom hath a red colour, and grows without a Stalk on the Bark of the Body of the Tree, from the top to the bot∣tom, and no where else; which chew'd in the mouth, by its tartness raiseth a little Phlegm or Spittle, and moves to Salubility. The Wood rubb'd small, and drank with Water, or hung about the Neck, is said to drive away the Hiccup.

Mimbouhe, a pretty Plant, yielding well-scented and wholesom Leaves, being wonderfully cordial.

Horame, a great Tree, distilling a Gum, to the Apothecaries known by the American Name of Taccamahacca; but it is properly a Rosin. The Tree attains the bigness of a Poplar, with long and small Leaves, whose Fruit is as big as an ordinary Plum, or a Walnut, thick and hard. The Wood hath been prov'd very serviceable to make Planks for great Ships and Barks.

Here grows also the Indian Fig-tree, by the Inhabitants call'd Nounouk; and by Linschot, in Portuguese, Avor de Rais, that is, The Tree of Roots, because of its great increase, by rooting with its hanging Boughs in the Ground, continually growing into others, which likewise send out more pendent Branches, to take new root; by that means increasing to a little Wood, or rather a Collection of shady Bowers, as we have already before more fully describ'd. Flaccourt re∣ports to have seen several by the Fort of Dauphin, which have put forth four thick Bodies, every one above two Fathom in compass. The Leaves carry the similitude of those of a Pear-Tree; and the Fruits (call'd Voanounouk, that is, Fruit of the Nounouk, or Indian Fig-tree) in taste resemble the Marzilian Figs. The Tree cut through, yields Milk; and of the Bark they make Ropes.

Vera, a small Tree, with Leaves like the Almond-Tree, of a dark green colour on the top, and underneath white and woolly; which apply'd to a Wound, draw and cleanse it.

Himavale, a little Plant, with six Leaves on each Stalk, which Physically used, strengthens the Heart, as Cordials, and are of a good smell.

Endrachendrach, a great Tree, with black Wood, hard as Iron, and durable under Ground as Marble; which also agrees with its name Endrachendrach, sig∣nifying Sempervive.

Tsimandan hath but few Leaves; but they good against the Pain of the Heart, Plague, and other dangerous Sicknesses.

Feaokosse, a Shrub bearing a round Fruit like a Cabbage, and good to eat.

Manoavavatte, a Tree with a hard green thorny Bark, and Fruit like a Hasle-Nut; of the Wood they make Handles for Lances.

Sira Manghits, signifying, A sweet Perfume, is a little Plant, whose Wood strengthens the Heart: The Leaves smell like those of Juniper, but the Bark like a Clove, and yields a good-scented Rosin.

Aboulaza brings forth a Cordial Wood.

Laherik grows with a straight and hollow Body, whereon the Leaves stand circularly, like a pair of round Stairs.

Fooraha yields a green and well-scented Balsom; a powerful Medicine for all Stabs, Cuts, and Bruises: The Women mix it amongst their Oyls where∣with they anoint themselves.

Mihahots, whose Wood, used Physically proves very corroborative.

Arindranto, good for nothing but to burn; nor that, till rotten: then it sends forth a pleasing scent.

Ouviwassa, a creeping Plant, whose Root resembles that of Jalap, and yields a Gum like that of Scamoni, which eaten, causes a violent Loosness, and without speedy help, the Bloody-Flux.

Saldits, a very curious Plant, with red Flowers, standing one by another, like a Plume of Feathers. The Seed makes a strong Vomit; but the danger easily abated, by taking some of the Root.

Pendre bears ten or twelve white Flowers, so odoriferous, that the Women lay them to steep in the Sun, in their Menachil, or Oyl of Sesamos.

Apokapouk hath Leaves like Lawrel, and such a Blossom, with Fruit as big as an Almond, but strong Poyson: Nevertheless, of the Kernel they make an Oyl to anoint Hair with.

Oniau bears a sort of Almonds, from which they extract an excellent Oyl, both to anoint Hair, and to eat.

Voulo is an Indian Cane, by Linschot and Acosta, from the example of the Indi∣ans, call'd Mambu and Bambu; full of a milky moisture, which the Arabian Drug∣gists call Tabaxir, and the Indians, Sacar Mambu, or Bambu, that is, Sugar of Mam∣bu; very highly esteem'd by the Arabians, Persians, Indians, and other Eastern People. These are the Canes they cut up and burn, to make a Compost of their Ashes, to inrich the Grounds intended for Planting of Rice. The Fruit (which it bears not till the third year) is of the thickness of a small Bean, whereof perhaps good Meal might be made. This Plant yields no less profit to the Islanders, then the Coco-Nuts do to the Indians; for they make thereof Pots to boyl Rice in, Pails, or Vessels to fetch Water in, Wine and Beer Flasks, Knives, Violins and Harps, Rice-Measures, Tobacco-pipes, Tinder-boxes, small Skiffs, for two Men to sit in, and row up and down in the Rivers; Roofs of Houses, Planks, and Stairs; and likewise Palanquins, or Sedans, wherein the Grandees of the Countrey are carried; for which purpose it is bended in its growth, to make these Chairs the easier.

Ampoufoutchy is a Wood extraordinary light, white, and easie to be wrought. Of the Bark they make Ropes.

Amaze is a Tree thick in Body, but shoots up aloft tapering like a Pyramide: The Fruit contains a white Marrow, with many hard Kernels within, like the Seeds of a Pine-apple.

Tanevoule is a Tree whose Leaves grow round about the Branches; without Stalks, very long and narrow, as if they were glew'd to them.

Onuvane, a sort of knotty Cane, like the Indian. The Root they account good Meat; and the Wood being Violet-colour, Dyes Red. Besides these, are many others found, which are much like the European, and seem to be one and the same.

The Countrey of Alfissack produces many Wild Grapes; but the Inhabitants do not eat them, being ignorant of their goodness. Good Tobacco grows all over the Countrey, and Hemp, there call'd Ahetsmanga Ahetsboule, which Flaccourt affirms both in Stalk, Leaf, and Seed, not to differ from that of Europe. This Hemp (saith the same Flaccourt) the Inhabitants plant with great diligence, and the dry'd Leaf they take in stead of Tobacco, which hath a stupifying quali∣ty, causing Drowsiness, Sleep; and pleasant Dreams. Those that are not us'd to take it, like two or three days together as if they were distracted; and therefore none but old Women, and the Ombiassen, that is, the Soothsayers, or Priests, and Learned Men, take of it. In the East-Indies they have a like sort of Plant call'd Bangue, and producing the same Effects; but the Stalk is thrown away, and useless.

Lastly, There grows also Taikombelahe, or Purslain, Cabbage, Radish, Dill, Turky-Wheat, Toughes, or Mustard-seed, and Datura, or Thorn-apple.

As this Island boasts so wonderful a fertility of Plants, * 1.53 so it is also stor'd with great numbers of several kinds of Beasts, Vermin, Fowl, and Fishes.

There are three sorts of Oxen; some with Horns; others without Horns, and round Heads, call'd Bouri; and the third with hanging or loose Horns, on∣ly fastned to the Skin. All these have great Lumps of Fat behind in their Necks, of which the Inhabitants make Suet, and use it in stead of Butter.

In the Territory of Machicore many of those Beasts are found, which in for∣mer times the Inhabitants say have been tame; and indeed they resemble ours in Europe, onely longer Legg'd, and run through the Woods in great Herds.

There are many Kabrito's, or Rams, whose Females have Young common∣ly three times a year, and four at each time. Some of the Sheep have great long Tails of five and twenty Pound weight, and nothing but clear Fat, which they boyl and eat, being excellent Food.

The Woods swarm with wild Hogs, which do great hurt to the Rice-Fields. The Flesh of these, but chiefly of the Sows and young ones, is esteemed a choyce Dainty. The common Hogs makes very good and wholsom Pork; for though one eats never so much of it, he will not surfet, perhaps by reason of their good feeding, which consists most in Land-Turtles, and their Eggs.

There are another sort call'd Tendrak, whose Flesh, though not very pleasing to the Pallat, yet the Inhabitants hold for a great Dainty: They sleep six moneths under ground without eating, and in that time shed their Bristles, and other new ones appear in their places, sharp, like those of Hedghogs.

Fosse is a Creature preying upon Poultry: they eat the Flesh thereof as whol∣som Diet.

Farassa, a devouring Beast, as big as a Fox, with a great long Tail, and Hair like a Woolf.

The Dogs are very small, with a long Snout, short Ears like a Fox, and such like Hair, but of several colours.

Monkies, or Baboons, are of several sorts; and amongst others great ones, being white, with Spots on their Ribs and Heads, and a long Snout like a Fox;

fierce of nature like Tygers, and make a great noyse in the Woods. Another sort have gray Hairs, are much smaller, with flat Noses, and easily made tame. A third, and the most common, call'd Varii, are gray, and long Nos'd, with great shaggy Tails. These may be tam'd without difficulty, if taken young, or else they will starve themselves to death.

There are white Apes, call'd Sifak, with yellowish Heads, white Tails, and two Spots on their Sides, are much bigger than the Varii, and usually walk on their hindmost Legs, and keep in the Woods in great companies. There is yet another sort of gray Apes, with Eyes shining like Fire, and short Hair, but not possible to be tam'd.

Fitsihi, or gray Squirrels, which commonly keep the Holes of hollow Trees, and not easily caught.

Vondsira, a small Vermine like a Weazle, of a darkish colour, greedily covets Honey, and smells like Musk.

There are many Civet-Cats, which the People of Manahengha and others eat.

Tre-tre-tre, or Tra-tra-tra, a Beast as large as a Cow, hath a round Head, and a Man's Face, and Feet like an Ape. Flaccourt taketh it for the Tanacht, de∣scribed by Ambrose Paree: It keeps for the most part alone by the Pool Lepo∣mami. The Inhabitants stand so much in fear of it, that they flye the sight of it, as that also runs away upon the appearance of a Man.

Antamba, a great Beast, with a round Head: The Negro's report it as fierce and ravenous as a Leopard, and that it devours both Men and Beasts, yet sel∣dom appears, but keeps in the Mountains.

Mangerzahok, a very great Beast, with round Feet like a Horse, and very long Ears, Brays like an Ass: why may we not suppose it to be a wild one?

Brehis, a Beast with one single Horn in the Forehead, as big as a Goats, is very wild. But there are neither Tygers, Horses, nor Lyons, as some have Written.

Famokantratra, * 1.54 a small Beast, having Legs at the Tail, above the Neck, and on the outmost part of the Chin, small Claws, with which it hangs fast on the Barks of the Trees. It holds the Mouth always open to receive Spiders, Muggs, and other Vermin, whereon it feeds: It gain'd the Name Flamo∣kantratra, that is, Breast-hopper, because it leaps upon the Breast of any that ap∣proach near the Tree where it sits; and sticks so close and fast, that the skin must be cut away with a Rasor to remove it: for which reason the Inhabitants much fear it.

Camelions, Valaau, Rats, Vourouzi, Mice, and other Vermine, breed here numerously.

Mandouts are a sort of Snakes as thick as a Mans Arm, but not venomous; yet much feared by the Inhabitants: It feeds upon Rats, and small Birds, which they fetch out of the Wastes.

Anakandef, a sort of small Snakes, which creep through the Fundament into Mens Bodies, as they sit to ease themselves upon natural occasions, and causeth great pain, and in a short time, death. There are many other Snakes, every one having a peculiar name, as Menore, Save, Mere, Tsiondiballe, Keneutsik, and others.

Sea and Land-Fowls breed here wonderfully, * 1.55 all call'd by one general name, Vourou, but smaller than in Europe.

There are Hens, which Lay Eggs no bigger than Pigeons. Also Pheasants, with Violet-colour'd Feathers, and red Bills, which are esteem'd a delicate Food. Likewise wild Violet and green Pigeons, Turtle-Doves, black and dark colour'd, red Paraketo's, small green ones, that Whistle, and mock the Notes or Voyces of other Birds; Turkycocks, white, black, and gray Cranes, with curious Feathers; wild Herons, with a Tuft on their Heads; Teals, with red Legs and Feet, call'd Halire; Lapwings, Dish-washers, and many others.

Sambe, which signifieth Burning, is a Bird with Feathers of a deep red colour.

Vourondoule, (the Bird of the Dead) they say, makes a great Chirping, and noise over the House where any one is to die.

Vouronchontsi, white Birds, that continually follow Oxen and Cows, and live by Muggs and Wasps.

Mangarent Souifoutehy, or Voula, a River-Bird, like a Sea-mew, with a white and long Bill.

Tahia hath black Quills, Feet, and Bill; and, like the Cuckow with us, sings this onely Note continually, Tahia.

Televa, a River-Bird as big as a Hen, with Violet-colour'd Feathers, and a red Bill and Feet.

Haretak hath a round Tuft on his Head, with black Feathers, and Feet like a Teal.

Proceed we next to Serpents and other Vermine, among which we shall put in the first place Scorpions, there generally call'd Hall, of which there are divers kinds, as the Tsingalaha, Huranou, a Water-Scorpion, because it keeps in Ditches and Standing-waters, kills Beasts and Dogs by sucking their Blood; Vankoho, or Spiders-head, having a great round and black Belly, is an exceeding dangerous Creature; for if any be stung by it, they fall immediately into a Swoon, remaining faint sometimes two or three days together, and as cold as Ice. They cure it in the same manner as the Sting of a Scorpion, by laying the Sick before a great Fire, and giving them wholsom Medicines to dispell the Poyson; Anakalife, a Reptile, breeding between the Barks of rotten Trees: It is about a handful long, full of Legs, flat and thick, with a very hard Skin. The Sting carries with it a mortal Poyson, bringing immediate death, unless prevented in the same manner as that of the Vankoko and Scorpion.

Akolalau, a small Vermine, in shape like a Wood-Lowse, but doth not stink so much: at full growth it attains the bigness of a Mans Thumb. The lesser sort of them sit in Houses, Huts, and Chests in great numbers, and eat through all things they can come at, especially Clothes.

Vombare, a parti-colour'd Creature, some of a Gold-yellow and Silver co∣lour, intermixt with others.

Sakondre, a sort of Meskito's, that sit on the Bark of a small Tree like white Blossoms, but afterwards change into several colours, as green intermixt with red, and the like. These make a Honey as sweet as Sugar.

Herechereche, a kind of Glow-worm, lies in the Night glistering in the Woods, and on the tops of Houses, like a spark of Fire.

Tsingoulou Voulou are of several sorts, a small Creature, infesting the Houses, but do a great deal of hurt by running over, and eating the Victuals, as Honey, Milk, and other Provisions.

There are also Pismires, which make Honey like Bees, in hollow Trees and heaps of Earth, wherein they sit by thousands.

Worms also breed there of divers sorts, * 1.56 as long Earth-worms, call'd Saho; Wood-worms, from eating the Wood, nam'd Anakau; and others with a Head like a Boar; Some with Scales on their Bodies, that eat into the Beams and Planks of a Ship, sloaping to one side, but go not quite through. Variety of Silk-worms, as Landeve, which produce one single Egge, with small Thorns; Landesaraha lay small Eggs, inclos'd in one greater, wherein sometimes are found above five hundred; The third Landeanakau, make their Silk on a Tree call'd Anakui, growing on the Sea-shore like a Cypress, and their Eggs hang one by one at a small Thred: this Silk proves the finest and strongest of all; The fourth, Landevansaqua, makes a fine Silk upon the Tree Vontonquer.

Land-Turtles, * 1.57 or Tanou, are many, and of two sorts, the one styl'd Helintsoka, and the others Fanou: Nor want they Bouchete, or great Toads, and Saouh Frogs.

The Inhabitants are either white or black; * 1.58 The Whites divide themselves into three Tribes, Rohandrians, Anakandrians, and Ondazatsi; The Blacks into four sorts, * 1.59 Voadziri, Lohavohits, Ontson, and Ondeves, as we before related at large in the Territory of Carcanossi or Anossi.

In some places they tell of a wild People, by them call'd Ompizees, which let Hairs of their Heads and Beards grow very long, and go stark naked, onely with a few broad Leaves before their Privacies. They keep in the thickest Woods, and shun Converse with any other Blacks, living upon Fish, Venison, Fruits, Roots, wild Honey, and Grashoppers.

Formerly there lived on the Island Ontaysatrouha, lying between the Anachi∣moussi and the River Ranoumene, a People which held conversation with their Neighbors, but Warred against them continually: and not onely against them, but likewise against all others that travel'd through their Countrey. They cut the sick Peoples Throats which they thought past recovery, and brought their Hands to the King to eat.

They feed many Cows, but neither kill them, nor Steers, Rams, Goats, nor Cocks (Cows Milk being their chiefest Diet) and therefore Heifers, Sheep, and Goats, they bring to sleep upon Mats, and after their death bury them under ground. They did eat Dogs with a great appetite, when no longer fit for Boar-hunting. They till'd their Ground in the same manner as the other Blacks on this Island. Their Features are frightful and ill-favor'd, for they have small Eyes, a broad Forehead, sharp Teeth, Camosie Noses, thick Lips, with short curl'd Hair, russet Skins, without Beards, great Belly'd, and thin Legs. These People did eat one another up, by which means being reduced to a small number, they were all, about a hundred and twenty years since, destroy'd by their neighboring People and Enemies; so that now not one of them remains.

Some have reported that Giants and Dwarfs have been found on this Island; but occular experience hath proved that Assertion but a Fable. In a Tract of Land by Itapere are many Stones erected, under which the Dwarfs are said to lie buried; for (say the Learned) they came in great numbers, and would have committed Spoil in the Countrey of Anossi, whence they had been driven to the River Itapere: but when for want of Boats they could not come over, they were all slain by the Inhabitants, and buried; who for a remem∣brance of the Victory, raised these Stones as a Monument.

No People in the world are so treacherous, * 1.60 spiteful, flattering, and lying, as those of Madagascar, onely towards the South-end in Mangabey they seem better condition'd, are less talkative, not so cruel in disposition, nor so deceit∣ful;

for they live according to other Laws and Customs, and boast them∣selves sprung from the Stock of Abraham. All the other do nothing but cheat, lye, and betray: they promise much, and do little, unless by compulsion: They Govern by tyrannous cruelty, without mercy or favour. If it chance that any escape their Enemies or Prosecutors hands, such is their monstrous ingratitude, that they never return thanks, but ascribe it to their Auli, or For∣tune, and it makes them more perverse than before. Cruelty and treachery they hold for two Capital Vertues; and those accounted weak Men, and faint∣hearted, who pardon an offence, or use remission and compassion: They for∣bear not to exercise their barbarous ferocity even upon Children, whom as they meet they cut or tear in pieces, and rip up the Women with an atrocity beyond the salvageness of Bruits, taking a delight to see them gasp and pant for life. Their Recreations are barbarous shriekings, which they term Sing∣ing, and antick skrewing of their Bodies in stead of Dancing. Man-like Exer∣cises they hate, alledging, that all things laborious bring much more displea∣sure and vexation, than delight: These mock at the French when they see them walk, and count them Fools for wearying themselves without a cause.

The civiler sort of these Islanders employ themselves in tilling the Ground, * 1.61 having little knowledge in Merchandise, neither taking care to find out Han∣dicrafts and Arts. They neither desire, nor indeed ask for such things as Fo∣reigners happen to bring thither, but remain satisfi'd with making and procu∣ring that which they need for sustenance, Clothing and Housing, without thought of superfluity: And this manner of life they hold more delightful and happy, than the enjoyment of superfluous Varieties. Their chiefest handy∣work is in building of Houses, working of Iron and Gold, Turning, making of Pots, Spinning, Weaving, Rope-making, Fishing, Hunting, and above all, (as already mention'd) cultivating the Ground.

The People of Ompanefavihe make of Iron and Steel, all manner of Imple∣ments, as Bills, Hammers, Knives, Tongs, in their Countrey Language call'd Fanghali, Scissers, little Pinsers to pluck out the Hairs, Spits to roast Meat on, Forcks, all sorts of Javelins, or Lances, Arrows, and great Butchers Knives.

The Goldsmiths, which proceed most out of the Territory of Voamaro, make of their In-land Gold, first melted in little Bars, Ear-rings and Armlets, Orna∣ments for the Neck, and other parts of the Body.

The Potters bake or burn with Haw-thorn Boughs, their Earthen Pots of all sorts, great and small Dishes, Platters, Pitchers, and Cups, which by rub∣bing over with a black Earth, shine, and are like Looking-glasses, as if they were Polish'd or Glaz'd.

The Turners and Workers in Wood make Wooden Dishes, Chests, by them call'd Vaa, Wooden, and Horn-Spoons, and other Housholdstuff.

In Architecture, if so we may call it, the Zafferamini, Rohandrians, Anakandri∣ans, are eminent.

They Fish with Nets like those us'd in Ships, Baskets in manner of Purse-Nets, * 1.62 Angles, and Lances, with Harping-Irons at the end. Those that Fish in the Sea, put out with small Canoos, so far as they can see, and catch with the foremention'd Baskets small Fishes, which serve them for Baits to catch big∣ger. Formerly they us'd to take Whales here, but now they have not the bold∣ness to atempt it.

The Rope-makers make Cords of all sizes and lengths; some of an hundred and thirty Fathom, besides smaller Tackle, to tie their Baskets and Nets.

The Women Spin, and Weave many sorts of Stuffs, of Flax or Thred, drawn from Barks of Trees, with which the Men must not meddle, as being an undervaluing.

Their Husbandry and method of Agriculture is perform'd with little labor; for they use neither Ploughs or Oxen, but meerly with a Bill cut away the great Trees, with a Cutting-Knife Prune off the Branches, and with other Implements, call'd Fangali, take away the Roots and Weeds out of the Earth, and cast it abroad. Afterwards the wither'd Trees, Branches and Boughs, when a strong Wind blows, are set on fire and burnt to ashes, and therein, after it is throughly moistned with Rain, they Plant the Igname-Roots, Rice, and other Provision for Food.

Notwithstanding their ignorance of Arts and Sciences, * 1.63 they are possess'd with the humor of Gaming, of which two sorts are chiefly in use, Andrauve and Fifangha. At the Game Andrauve they Play with little Shells, found on the Sea∣shore, which they turn round, that at a little distance they may strike one upon another. All the Men, as well great as small, are so much besotted with this Game, that sometimes they will venture a whole Ox at one of those hits. Fi∣fangha is a very pleasant Sport, but requires greater nimbleness of Wit and Judgment than that of Andrauve, because it consists most in sleight of hand: two Gamesters can onely Play; the manner is with certain round Fruit, call'd Bassy, * 1.64 to the number of sixty four, upon a Wooden Table, with two and thirty holes, in four rows one by another, sixteen for one Gamester, and sixteen for the other. This Game hath great agreement with Chesse, or Draughts.

Their Songs, * 1.65 which (as we said) are very untunable, yet consist not as to scurrility or obscenity, but either satyrical Reproofs, or high Eulogies of the Vices or Vertues of particular Persons, or else in exalting the praise-worthy, and famous Deeds of their Ancestors.

In Singing they continually Dance and Leap, having a Valihan, or small In∣strument of Musick in their Hands, with some Strings; or Playing upon a Voulle, or Bambo's-Cane with six Strings, or upon a Herraavou, a Musical Instru∣ment struck with little Sticks, somewhat after the manner of a Jewish Dul∣cimer.

Those of Carcanossi Dance turning round, and going one after another, then standing still, and at last falling off on the sides at the sound of a Drum, but not without shewing a thousand fantastick postures.

The Herraavou Players have commonly most followers, which relate or ex∣press nothing but serious Matters, though sometimes old Stories and Fancies.

The Houses have no Chambers above, * 1.66 nor Cellars underneath; but meerly one Room, which they call Varerarai, with a small Floor or Cieling. The Roof stands sloaping, made of the Leaves call'd Rattes, and Bambo's Canes, or of Boughs. The Walls made of Planks two Inches thick. The Hearth-place at the end of the House, about four Foot square, heightned with Sand, upon which lie three Stones to set the Pot upon, but without a Chimney, so that the Smoke goes all over the House; which makes their Abodes very unplea∣sant, they likewise keeping continual Fires, though the heat of the Weather be never so excessive.

The Ware-houses, wherein they keep their Rice, stand by themselves rais'd upon Posts, to hinder the Rats climbing up to it.

The Rohandrians spend some time two or three years in building their Hou∣ses, * 1.67 not that the curiosity of workmanship, or largeness of dimensions requires

[illustration]

so much time, but in conjecturing by their Prognostications and Sorcery, about lucky Days and Hours to work in. The House finished, they set a lucky Moneth or Day apart, to keep their Missavatsi, that is, their Entrance, or House∣warming, which they ceremoniously observe: To which end the Master of the House calls together all to him, and all their Kindred, Friends and Acquain∣tance, who bring Cattel for a Present, some seven, some five, some three, others but one, according to every ones ability, to the meanest Slave, who bring Baskets of Mats, Dishes, Earthen Pots, Honey, Wine, Bannanes-Fruit, and Roots of Rice; so that upon that Day none appears empty handed. It hath happen'd within few years, that a certain Dian, or Lord, by Name Ramach, pre∣sented to another Dian, call'd Tserong, at the Mistavatsi of a new House, a Gold Chain, worth an hundred Beasts, eighteen Baskets of Rice, and as many of Ignames, and so all the rest, every one according to his Estate, so that this Dian Tserong had the worth of a thousand Head of Cattel. After all the Presents are brought together, and the Assembly Day come, Dian Tserong appeared in the Evening, in his Angarata, cover'd with a long Garment, and Gold Menilies, and other costly Habiliments, with a Sword by his side; twenty Ondzatsi, that is, Fishers, who were follow'd with Women, with necessaries of Wood to make Clothes with; afterwards came nine Rohandrians, each carrying three Sugar-Canes, and eight Ondzatsi, every one with a Wax Torch; then all the chief Ro∣handrians made a turn thrice round about the House; entring into the House, they all one with one voyce make a great noyse, crying altogether, Ha; then stamp upon the Ground with their Feet, and tumble down upon it, crying Hic, hac, ha, whereupon all the standers by cry aloud, Dria, dria, dria, Rohandria, takalounaho, falissanaho, that is, Sir, we wish you luck and good speed: whereupon the Dian Tserong answer'd, Vellam coua Auareo, that is, The same I wish to you, with some other words of like good will on both sides. At last Dian Tserong parts the Sugar-Canes among the Rohandrians to eat.

The next day in the Morning a Rohandrian appears bravely Clothed, with a

Girdle across, after the manner of a Star upon his Breast, and after three times turning round about the House, with a great Slaughter-Knife in his Hands laid thirty six Oxen upon the Ground, with their Legs ty'd together, and cut their Throats, dipt his Finger in the Blood, and put it upon his Forehead, and upon his Breast, and brought it to Dian Tserong, and the Rohandrians: after this was done, he with Fewel made a Fire, and singed off the Hair, and cut the Oxen in pieces, and divided them amongst the standers by: Next morning he fell to drinking of Wine, and in the Evening eat Rice and other Food, which continu'd so for eight days, slaying every day so many Oxen, without reckon∣ing other Cattel, which he distributed among the Dians, or Lords of the Towns, and Lovahits; so that above four hundred Beasts were eaten at this Missavatsi, and yet Tserong had great Gain, and for the Expences laid out in building of his House, was richly paid.

This House was about four Fathom broad, and eight or nine Fathom long, but scarce high enough for a Man to stand upright in, with Walls of Planks two Inches thick; it stood two Foot and a half from the Ground, and had six Doors, two before, and two behind, and on each side one, but all low, so that without stooping none could go in: The Roof ran up to a Point, consisting of Leaves call'd Rattes, which lay cross one upon another, bound together with Mahovits, and Peeling of a certain Tree, together with Bambo's Canes, cut into little Shingles, very neatly. This manner of Roofing is very handsom, but subject to burning. Some cover their Houses with green Boughs and Grass; others with broad Leaves, call'd Raven pandre, but they are not so du∣rable.

Their Housholdstuff consists in Mats, * 1.68 which they call Sihi, and are two∣fold; some red and yellow-colour'd, and very neatly; others common, but yet very convenient; both Braided, or made of several sorts of Bulrushes; with which (in stead of Tapistry) they hang the Walls of the Houses, and sleep up∣on them; for Bedding, Sheets, Mattresses, or Coverlets, are not made among them, being from their Infancy us'd to lie hard. A great many Baskets, where∣in they lay up their Clothes, Girdles, or Belts, or Saravohits, Cotton-Merchan∣dize, and all Ornaments which they have. Little Earthen Cruises for their Oyl, wherewith they anoint their Hair and Bodies. Kitchin-Vessels, as Earth∣en Pots, call'd Villangues, Louvies, Faffes, Monhonges, and Sines; Wooden Dishes and Spoons, Pitchers to fetch Water in, Knives call'd Antsi, great and small, both sorts made very neatly, according to the Mode of the Place; small Pin∣cers to pull Thorns out of their Feet, and to pull off the Hair; great Slaughter-Knives, to cut Cattels Throats, Iron Forks to pull the Meat out of the Pots, Roasters, or Gridirons, of three Irons, or Ribs, call'd Zalaza; and a Mortar to stamp Rice in, with a Wooden Bason to Fan it in. Cruises, or Pots, of above a hundred Quarts, wherein they make Meath of Honey. But they use no Table-Linnen, Towels, Earthen or Pewter Trenchers, nor Tables or Stools; but the Earth, spread over with a Mat, serves them both for Table and Stools; and great Leaves call'd Rattes, of twelve Foot long, and four broad, for Tren∣chers and Table-clothes: of these Leaves also Spons and Drinking-Cups are made, and Roofs for their Houses, when they are dry.

The Men wear a Cloth, * 1.69 call'd Laneba, about their Bodies, with a Saravorits under their Drawers; but the Women an Accanza, or long Coat without Sleeves; though those of Manghabei wear them with Sleeves, and a little Cloth before their Privacies in stead of an Apron: Both Men and Women go bare∣head

[illustration]

and bare-foot, except those of Manghabei, where the Men wear a four∣square Bonnet, and the Women a Caproeu, Kerchiff, or Hood, sharp above, which comes half way their Heads, but hangs behind their Necks, and over their Shoulders.

Their Clothes are of several colours and names; some all of red Silk call'd Sohatsmifili; others of Cotton styl'd Varo; a third of red and mingled-colour'd Silk, Woven with pure Cotton underneath, and strip'd with white; others of Peelings of the Bark of Fantatstanou, Try, Mouffia, Avo, Courave, and the Thred of the Bananos-Tree. The best and finest are Cotton-Clothes of Anossi, made by the Zafferamini, and much bought up. Them which are chiefly desired, have the breadth of twelve Inches, below border'd with Silk, the Ground of it white, with black Stripes; and some of black Woven Cotton and red Silk: and the great Rohandrians themselves may onely wear that, and onely in great Solemnities: They provide it also to Livery their Grandees in.

The Clothes of the Bark of Fantatstanou, are made near Manatengha, Manghafia, Soudrevingha, and Anossi, in this order: The Bark of the Tree, growing at the Water side, they first draw to Thred, and afterwards boyl in a strong Lye: the scowr'd Threds are afterwards twisted together, and by means of a Spindle, spun together, and at last Woven into Cloth. This Cloth so imitates ours of Hemp or Flax, that such as had never seen it, would have taken it for the same. It wears strong, and endures three times as long as Cotton. Of this Bark also they make Sail-Clothes, or Cordage.

The Clothes of the Bark Try are made of the Sazles of Thred, of a certain Shrub that affords Milk, and groweth much in the Territory of Ampatre, wears very soft, but not so strong as the Cotton. The Clothes call'd Afouche are com∣monly in the Countrey of Matatane, made of the Bark of the Plant Avo; of which also they make Paper, soft and gentle, but not strong. Moufia Clothes are wrought in Galemboullou, Manghabei, and the Bay of Antongil, of the Peelings of tender Leaves, which shoot from the Tree Moufia, the overgrown being

great stalky Leaves, twelve or fifteen Foot long. Bananos Clothes are very light, and as fine as Silk Clothes. All these are Woven in the same manner as our Linnen.

The Ornaments, * 1.70 or Firavach, with which these Islanders dress themselves, consist especially in Chains, which they wear on their Necks, Arms and Legs; Gold Ear-rings, Bracelets or Rings, and other small Trifles, Saraves, of Chains of Glass-Beads, fine Pearls, Corral, Pipes of Gold, Beads of red Crystal, Agats, Cornelions, Sardonyx, two or four double hang'd about the Neck. Salintes consist of pieces of Corral, Agats, and red Crystal. Endach are made of all sorts of colour'd small round Glass-Beads, and four, six, eight, or twelve Strings worn at once. The Zafferamini, or Whites, of Matatane, have their Ears bor'd through, wherein they wear Gold Ear-rings, which are of two sorts, one of clean and Massie Gold, which they call Foamitoulie; the other onely an East-India Snall-shell, cover'd over with Leaf-gold, and curiously wrought: for Goldsmiths there have no Borax, yet they know with small red Beans (in their Countrey Language call'd Voamene, and in the Indian, Condure) how to Solder small Grains of Gold together very handsomly and artificially. They have the Gilded Shells made into Necklaces, by them denominated Verenhere. Also Menilies of Gold, Silver, and Brass on their Arms, and Gold, Silver, and Cop∣per Rings on their Fingers; besides Matahets an Poutan on their Thighs, Arms, and Legs, of the same Stuff with their Neck-chains.

The Zafferamini, and chiefest Anakandrians, may wear the beforemention'd Ornaments; but the Blacks not, except the Voadziri, and Lohavohits, to whom and their Wives and Children it is permitted to wear Gold Ear-rings, and some pieces of Gold, but Pendants onely of Silver or Copper.

Every one may have as many Wives as he can keep, * 1.71 whom they intitle Manpirate, that is, Make-bates: for the Women of one Man alone, hate one ano∣ther as deadly Enemies, and call one another by the Name of Mirafe, that is, Envy, without taking exceptions at it.

The Women are no less addicted to Venereal Sportings than the Men, and they let no opportunity pass to accomplish those Designs, having always be∣sides their Husband one or two Gallants, with whom to take their pleasure.

Unmarry'd Girls give their Viginity to the first that come to them, if they give them Money; but if they fail of Payment, they deride and disgrace them, by taking away their Garment, which they cannot regain but by recon∣ciliation. But Slaves who have no Money, spend their wanton Lusts with Beasts, without being punished or reproved for it.

Whoredom between unmarry'd Persons they account no sin against God or Man; yea, no Girl will promise her self to a Suitor, whom she hath not had the proof of often, and a long time before: And Marry'd people themselves think the bonds of Wedlock a wrong to them.

Young Youths and Girls use their pleasure together in the presence of their Parents, who are not onely pleased therewith, but provoke them to it.

Yet among all this common and beastial licentiousness, they account it a great shame for their Daughter or Wives, to be too much addicted to wanton unchastity, to hear them prate of it, or to divulge any evil Prank they have done: Moreover they think it redounds to their dishonour, that any should ask them how many Wives they have, or whether they be fair or ill-favor'd.

Here are found some impotent effeminate Men, call'd Tsecats, who seek for Boys, and fall in Love with them under pretence of being Women; and to that

[illustration]

purpose name and Clothe themselves as Women, whom in all Cases they avoid and shun, because they have from youth up made a vow, never to know any of that Sex.

Their manner of Burials hath great Ceremonies: * 1.72 for the next of Kin to the Deceased wash the Corps very clean, and adorn it with Gold Bracelets, Ear∣rings and Chains, deckt with Beads and other Gayeties, and so bury in two or three of his finest Garments; but carry it wound up in a great Mat to the Grave. Persons of Quality have their Hair shaven off, and Women have a Quoif put on: but before that is done, all the Acquaintance, Friends, and Slaves of the Deceased come into the House of the Dead, lamenting round about the Corps, at whose Feet a Candle stands burning night and day. In the mean while the Drummers beat upon the Drums, and many Women and Maids Dance to the sound thereof a sober Dance; which done, they go to la∣ment in the Funeral-house, and so fall to Dancing again, the Men by turns exercising themselves with their Weapons. Those that lament in the House of Mourning, exalt the Praise of the Deceased, declaring how much sorrow his departure brings, and speak of him as still alive: Lastly, having bewail'd the Corps till the Evening, Oxen are slain, and the Flesh when boyl'd or roasted, distributed among the Assembly. The next day in the Morning the Corps is laid into a strong Chest, made of two pieces of the Stock of a Tree hollow'd, close joyn'd, and therein carry'd to the Church-yard, by them call'd Amounouque, where they set it in an artificial Vault, six Foot under ground, with a Basket of Rice, a Box of Tobacco, Earthen Dishes, some Comfects, Perfumes to burn, Clothes, and a Girdle; then being shut up, and a great Stone, twelve or fifteen Foot high, set before it, many Beasts are sacrificed, of which they leave one part for the Dead, one for the Devil, and one for God: The acquaintance af∣ter eight or fifteen days send by the Slaves Food to the Dead, and cause him to be saluted as if alive. They set up also round about the Grave upon Stakes, the Heads of the sacrificed Beasts, and the Children come thither from time to

time to sacrifice an Ox, and to ask counsel of the Dead about that they mean to undertake, with these words: Thou who now art with God, give us Counsel in this, or the other Matter, which they then name. If they be sick, or afflicted with distemper of Mind, then presently the next Friends to the Sick send an Ombyasse, or Priest, to seek the Spirit in the Church-yard, who goes thither in the Night, and makes a hole in the Vault where the Corps lie, and calls the Soul of the Father of the Sick, asking it, Whether the Spirit hath nothing more for his Son or Daughter. Furthermore, he holds a Cap over the hole, and presently shuts the Cap close to it, and runs point-blank to the House of the sick Person, who is sottish enough to say, That he feels himself well, and hath gotten his Spirit again which he had lost in his Sickness, appointing a Present to be given to the Ombyasse.

When any Person of Eminency happens to die far from his Countrey, then they cut his Head off, to bring it to his native Soyl, but bury the Carcase where he died. If he be slain in the Wars, they bury him in that place where kill'd, but upon the setling of Peace dig him up again, and lay him in the Vault with his Ancestors.

The solemnest and highest Oath which they take, * 1.73 is by the Souls of their Ancestors.

Among all the Inhumanities of these salvage People, * 1.74 the most horrible and abominable is, that the People of Madagascar do cruelly cast away their Chil∣dren; so that Men have no cause at all to wonder, why this Island, so large and fertile, falls short in the account of populosity, because from the Birth those Innocents are condemn'd to lose the light of the Day, before they have scarce seen it, suffering it to perish by the sottish and damnable advice of their Ombyasses, or Priests, who counsel the Fathers to leave their Children, and cause them by a Slave to be carry'd far from the Town, and under some Hedge, or in the Woods, to be expos'd to the mercy of Wind and Weather, Dogs, wild Bears, and other devouring Beasts, where at last with much cry∣ing and lamenting, they famish for Hunger and Thirst, or are cruelly de∣vour'd.

The cause why they do thus destroy their new-born Children is, that they believe them born in an unlucky Day, Moneth, or Hour, and the rather, when the Ombyasse sees, that the Configuration of the Childs Planets do not serve his purpose, then says that the Child will be a Murtherer of his Father and Mother, and his Life unfortunate, and inclin'd to do all manner of evil, and therefore must be made away.

The unfortunate Moneths are especially April, which they call Saffard, and the Fasting Moneth, Rama-hara; but in every Moneth the eighth Day, nam'd Assaronton, and the last Quarter of the Moon, call'd Alcacossy. Wednesdays and Fridays in every Week are ill Days, and the Hours which are govern'd by an evil Vitang, or Planet; so that these People account almost half the Year un∣lucky. Nevertheless, some among them have a little more pity and compas∣sion towards their Children, and after they have so barbarously expos'd them, let their Slaves (their Maid-Servants) go instantly, and take it thenceand Suckle it: however, they account it no more theirs, but appropriate to the Person that takes it up, or the Nurse. Others are satisfi'd by performing Fa∣lis for their Children, that is, they sacrifice Beasts and Hens, and shut them half a day (as they say) to prevent the malign influence of the Constellation that reigns over them: for if they should let them live, and not perform this,

Ceremony, they would another day be Robbers and Murtherers of their Fa∣thers, and adicted to all Mischief.

If a poor unmarried Woman-Slave have a Child, and her Master hath put her away, she will not stick to drown the Child in the River, or bury it alive in the Ground, or otherwise kill it, to rid her of the burthen, trouble, and care of bringing up. If a Woman, when she is great with Child, and is very sick, or has hard Labor, they impute the fault to the Child, and the Woman orders them to kill, or to bury it alive.

If the Daughter of a Rohandrian hath had to do with a Negro before she be Married (as they all do, none excepted) she either causes an Abortion, or, if she be deliver'd, makes away the Child.

Nevertheless, there are some, though few, that do it not, but cause the Child to be carried afar off, and nursed by her own Negresses.

Lastly, If a Woman die in Labor, they bury the Child alive with the Mother, saying, That it is better it should die than live, having no Mother left to bring it up.

The Inhabitants, both Whites and Blacks, * 1.75 observe a peculiar and evil Custom in Eating, though their Victuals is dress'd very neatly and handsomly.

The People of the Rohandrians eat with Rohandrians; the Lohavohits, with Lohavohits; the Ontsoa's, with their own Tribe, and never intermixedly; in∣somuch that no Rohandrian Woman, married to an Anakandrian, will endure that her Husband should eat with her: But in Manghabei, the Slaves eat with their Masters.

They have their Meal-times commonly in the Morning, and in the Evening; but the Zafferamimi make five or six Meals in a day.

Their usual Food is Rice, Beans, Voanzonrouk, or little Wheat, * 1.76 call'd also Vo∣enzou, or Mimes, and Voamitsa-Ofekque; Ignames of several sorts; Coleworts, which they call Sanzes, and Varuattes; Oxen, Sheep, Goats, Hens, Capons, Turkeys, by them styl'd Alcanga; Ducks, Pigs; but never any grown Hogs, except they Hunt them, and then they and their whole Family eat them: Ma∣ny sorts of Sea and River Fish; Menachil, or Oyl of Sesamos, and Oyl of Ovi∣naa: Several Fruits, as Vontaka, Lamontes, Voarats, Voanattes, Lotfes, Sakol, the Fruit Sakre, Co, Sugar-Canes, and Bananoes. They live also, in time of Scarci∣ty or Famine, upon certain Roots which grow in the Water, and in the Woods; as Roots of Ouirandre, Oumenpasso, and Ouuirouzes. For Sauce to their Meat, they usually have Ginger, Garlick-Leaves, and White Pepper, though at the begin∣ning they look'd upon it as Poyson. Their usual Drink is warm Water, or the Broath wherein they boyl their Meat. They make Wine of Honey; yet they drink it not, but in their Missavatsi, and chief Solemnities.

They speak but one Language through the whole Island; * 1.77 but very different in the Tone and Pronunciation; some giving them a short, and some a long Accent.

This Language hath much affinity with the Eastern, especially the Arabick; and great agreement with the Greek, as well in the manner of Expression, as in the connexing of Names and Compound-words. Every thing is call'd accord∣ing to the Action, or manner of Operation by which it is effected: as, a bro∣ken Tree, or Stick, they call Hazonfaulac; a torn Cloth, Sichinrota; a broken Pot, Vilanghavakqui; broken Thred, Foulomaitou; and so many other things: which expresseth the copiousness of the Tongue.

In the manner of their speaking, there happens a change of some Conso∣nant

Letters. The V is chang'd into a B, when the anticedent Word ends in a Consonant; as for Exampie, Vohits signifies A Mountain; but to say Ambohits, which signifies In the Mountain, the V must be chang'd into B: The Letter F they turn into P, thus: Fasso signifies Sand, or the Shore; but when the Word An comes before it, they must say Anpasso, that is, In, or on the Sand, or Shore; as also in many others: The Lords Prayer is thus; Amproy Antsica izau hanoutang andanghitsi, angharanau hofissahots, Vahouachanau hoavi aminay, fiteiannau boefaizangh an tane toua andanghitsi; Mahoumehanau anrou aniou abinaihane antsica, aman hanau Mang∣bafaca, hanay ota antsica; Tona-Zahai Manghafaca hota anreo Mououany, amanhanau aca Mahatet Seanay abin fiuet seuetse ratsi, fehe hanau Metezaha hanay tabin haratsian abi, Amin.

The Letters which the Ombiasses or Priests make use of, are the same with the Arabick, and eight and twenty in number, written from the right hand to the left; though the Pronunciation of some of them differ from those of the Ara∣bick. These Letters, about two hundred years ago, were brought in among them by certain Arabians, who were sent into this Island by the Caliph of Mecha, and Landed in Matatane, where they Married the Native Women, and Instru∣cted every one that would in the Arabick Tongue, and Alchoran, as they do at this day.

The Paper they write upon is yellow, and made of the middlemost Bark of the Tree Avo, almost in the same manner like that of Europe, but with trou∣ble and preparation; * 1.78 that is, They boyl the Bark two days in a great Kettle, with very strong Lye of the Ashes of the Tree; afterwards, being tender and supple, they wash it in clear Water, and then in a Wooden Mortar beat it to Pap, which they lay together upon a Sieve, or Canvas, made of small thin Reeds put together, to drain; and afterwards upon a Leaf of Balisier, anoint∣ed with Oyl of Menachil, and laid to dry in the Sun: As soon as it is dry, they draw it through a thick Decoction of Rice, to prevent sinking of the Ink, and then again lay it to dry, pressing it flat and even.

Their Ink is made of the Decoction of the Wood Arandrantes (of which the Grandees build their Houses) and the Gum Carabe comes from it, * 1.79 which they let stand till the thinner and more subtle parts exhaled, it becomes thick again. This Ink proves very good and durable, though not so black as ours in Europe; but the addition of a little Copperas makes it a pure Black. It hath no need of Gum, the Wood of which being boyl'd hath enough of it self; and if it chance to be dry'd, they boyl it up with a little Water, and it becomes as good as at first.

Their Writing-Pens are made of Bamboes Reeds, * 1.80 which they call Voulou; of which, cutting off a Piece the length of ones Hand, they shape a Pen as we do, fit and convenient to write with.

The Natives of Madagascar number or reckon like the Europeans, * 1.81 from one to Ten; and to Ten they add One, Two, and so the following Numbers to Twenty, in this manner: Issa, or Irache, is One; Roe, Two; Telon, Three; Ef∣fats, Four; Luui, Five; Enem, Six; Fiton, Seven; Valou, Eight; Siui, Nine; Foulo, Ten; Irach-foulo-ambi, or Iraiche amainifoulo, Eleven; Roe foulo pambi, Twelve; Roepoulo, Twenty; Telou ambi, Thirty; Effats poulo, Forty; Zatou, An hundred; Armou, A thousand; Alen, An hundred thousand. Indeed the Blacks of the Mountains, or on that side of the Countrey of Machicore, where nothing is Planted nor Sow'n, know not how to keep any Account.

They use also divers Weights, * 1.82 but none heavier than a Quarter of an Ounce;

[illustration]

for the Ounces, half, and whole Pound they use not. With these they weigh on∣ly Gold and Silver. A Quarter of an Ounce they call Sompi; a Half-ounce, Vari; a Grain, Sacare; a Half-grain, Nanqui; six Grains, Nanque.

Their Measures are several; viz. Rice-measure, * 1.83 with them call'd Trouba∣houache, which is said to be the Kings Bushel; Moucha, or Monca, a Measure of six Pints of cleansed Rice; Voule, Half a Pint; Zatow is an hundred Voules, and therewith they mete unbeaten Rice.

The Measure for Clothing, Cords, and other things to be estimated by Length, they name Refe, and contains a Fathom; but Ells, Feet, or Inches they have no knowledge of.

They set forth Lands, not by Rods, Perches, and Acres; but by the quantity of Rice that may be Sow'n upon it.

The Trade of these Islanders one among another consists in exchanging Wares for Wares; for Money, * 1.84 or Coyn of Gold and Silver, they have none; and if they get any of Foreign People, they melt it, and make thereof Bracelets and Armlets: But especially they use Glass Beads, and other Commodities which the French bring to them, in stead of Money, to buy Oxen, Cotton, Silk Clothes, Iron Assagays, or Lances, Bills, Knives, and other Necessaries. Those that have need of Cotton, bring to the Places where it is to be had, Rice, or Beasts; and they that have need of Beasts, or of Rice, come with Cotton to the Places where Rice and Beasts are plenty, to barter one for the other. They exchange also Gold and Silver, for Copper and Iron: But this onely among themselves; for with Foreigners they neither do, nor care to deal: So that hitherto in that Countrey there hath little Merchandise of consequence been discover'd, al∣though there grows indubitably Sapphyres, Rubies, Smaragdines, Cornelians, and other Precious Stones, as appears by the Trials which the French have made of them, and sent into Europe.

The most desired Merchandises, and by the Islanders best liked, are red Beads of all Sorts, Sizes, and Colours, pierc'd with Holes, that they may be strung

into Bracelets; large and yellow Brass Wyre, and several other small Wares; as yellow little Brass Chains, Scissors, Knives, Bills, Hatchets, Hammers, Nails, Padlocks, and several other Trinkets, which with great Profit are exchanged and traded for against their Island Commodities.

Flaccourt, in his Deseription of Madagascar, judgeth this Island to be of great concernment, for the advan••ing and settling of Trade on the Coast of Ethiopia, the Red-Sea, the Persian Gulph, and other Places of the East-Indies; and might bring great Advantage and Profit, by Wood for building of Ships, that might be carried from thence to all the aforesaid Places, to exchange for other Com∣modities: He adds moreover, That this Island may serve for a Ladder or Step, as may be said, whereby to climb to the Trade and Voyages of the East-Indies.

All their Wealth consists in the foresaid Goods, * 1.85 as also in Axes, Knives, Bills, sharp Iron and Steel Spades, Clothes, Oxen, Fields to plant Rice and Ig∣names in, and abundance of Slaves. The Zafferamini possess the most Gold, which they keep as much hidden as they can from the French.

No Eminent Person upon the whole Island is without some Gold of his An∣cestors, which no way assimilates our European Gold, but is much paler, and al∣most as soon melted as Lead; they dig it out of the Ground in several Places. They have some Gold in Manghabei; but it lieth buried in their Church-yards, and they dare not bring it to light from thence, alledging, They are unworthy of it.

Most esteem the reddest Silver higher than the finest; but the People of Anossi can well tell how to distinguish it: yet their Goldsmiths would not know how to work European Gold, because they say it is too difficult to melt. That of ours they call Voulamena Voutroua; but their own, Ahetslaua, and Lit∣charongha, or Voulamena Madecasse.

In Military Affairs these People know nothing; * 1.86 but in such Cases, by sud∣den Attempts coming upon their Enemies unawares, and by surprise; assem∣bling privately, and marching by secret and unfrequented ways in the Woods. When they come to the Enemies Quarters, they make their Assault with a hi∣deous and horrible Cry; and being enter'd, kill all that come next to hand, not sparing Infants at their Mothers Breasts; exercising this Cruelty with pur∣pose to extirpate the whole Generation of their Enemies, for fear that the Suc∣cessors, sooner or later, if they left them alive, might take Revenge.

They often send Spies into their Enemies Quarters, to know his Condition, and where the chiefest Town is, and most Cattel; and therefore at such time they all drive them into the Mountain, to which access is difficult. They send out sometimes Parties, twenty, thirty, or forty of a Company, to plunder small Villages, and lay the subdu'd Towns in Ashes: These Parties they style Tafichemanthy, that is, A secret Army.

These come usually provided with Auli and Moussanes, that is, with Sorcery, and written Arabick Letters, with firm belief, That these Letters will do their Enemies much annoyance, viz. take away their courage, cause them to die by Sickness, and at least be the chiefest cause of their destruction; whereas, to them, on the other side, it gives Courage, and brings all Success.

Their Arms are various, * 1.87 according to the several Countreys. In the Terri∣tory of Androbeizaha, they use a great Assagay, arm'd at the end with a broad and long sharp Iron Head, and carry besides ten or fifteen Fiteracks, or small Casting-Darts, as also a great Javelin, call'd Renelefo, that is, The Mother of Assagays.

In Manghafia they use a round Shield, and great Canbahi, or Javelin: So do they also in Ampatre, Mahafalle, Machicore, and Andribeizaha; but the Countreys of Anachimoussi, Eringdranea, and Vohits-anghombe, afford the best-arm'd and most undaunted Soldiers.

On that side of the River Mananghourou, three Miles below Galemboulou, are a Generation of about four or five hundred strong, very undaunted, which fight with Bowes, Arrows, and Darts. Those of Manghafia, up Northwards to the end of the Island, fight Foot to Foot, onely with an Assagay, under shelter of a round Shield. Those of Manamboulle, the most Warlike and un∣daunted of all, fight both at a distance, and at hand.

In Battel they keep no Order, Ranks, or File, but Fight in Crowds, every one resolving to do some Execution. When any fall down wounded, they set up their Throats with a horrible cry; and no Slave, how mean soever he be, but sticks his Assagay in the Body of the languishing Person.

While the Men stay in the Wars, the Women cease not night and day to Dance, and neither sleep nor eat in their Huts; nor, be they never so addicted to Venereal sports, will they at that time have to do with any other Man, be∣lieving if they should, their Husbands would either be slain or wounded in the War.

When any great Man finds his Power too weak to follow the War any longer, he sends one to the Enemy with some Presents to desire Peace, and to appoint a Day for a Treaty, upon the concluding whereof, they meet one an∣other on the Shore of a River, each with all his People and Soldiers, standing as ready for a Battel; where each of them kill a Heifer, and reciprocally send a piece of Silver to eat, making deep Asseverations, and high Oaths, that if they purpose any longer to continue the Wars, to rob one another of their Cattel, or make use of Sorcery or Poysoning to damnifie each others Countrey, then that the Silver given each of them at present may cause them to burst; that God may withdraw his hand from them; that they may be brought to destruction by their Enemies, and their Generations and Posterity come to an end. But if one of them be overcome, so that he can no longer maintain the War, then he must submit, and after sending one of his People for safe Conduct, go himself in Person thither; and then the Vanquisher gives the Vanquished the Liver to eat, for a Confirmation that he will remain faithful to him: Whereas yet oftentimes these Oathes are very sleightly accounted, the better afterwards to betray one another; wherefore they also, notwithstanding their Oath, stand upon their Guard.

They have some superficial knowledge of the Course of the Heavens, * 1.88 and of the Zodiack, being distributed into twelve Signs, which by the Ombyasses, or Priests, are call'd Vintangs, and have the following Appellations; Viz.

In the Spring there is

• Alimiza, that is, Libra.
• Alicarobo, that is, Scorpio.
• Alacossi, that is, Sagittary.

In the Summer,

• Alizadi, that is, Capricorn.
• Adalou, that is, Aquarius.
• Alohotsi, that is, Pisces.

In Harvest or Autumn,

• Alahemali, that is, Aries.
• Azorou, that is, Taurus.
• Alizozo, that is, Gemini.

In Winter,

• Asarata, that is, Cancer.
• Alaasade, that is, Leo.
• Asomboulo, that is, Virgo.

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

The Year they divide into twelve Months, thus denominated:

• Vatrevate, that is, March.
• Saffard, that is, April.
• Atsisi, or a Soutri, that is, May.
• Valascira, that is, June.
• Fossa, that is, July.
• Maka, that is, August.
• Hiahia, that is, September.
• Sakamasseh, that is, October.
• Sakave, that is, November.
• Voulanbitou, that is, December.
• Asarmanghits, that is, January.
• Asarabe, that is, February.

The New Year beginneth with them at the New Moon in March; but they have a Reckoning by Fasting-time, as also by the Days of the Week, beginning with Friday.

The Religion both of Whites and Blacks consists onely in Superstition, with∣out the use of Churches or Prayers; yet they observe Circumcision.

They know and believe indeed, That there is a God, who hath made Hea∣ven and Earth, and all Creatures, and innumerable Angels; but reverence or worship him not: They live according to the Law of Nature, without fear∣ing him; but make indeed Confession of their Sins, especially decripit old Men, upon their Death-Beds. They believe also, That there is a Devil, whom they greatly fear, and call Taiwaddey: That God is all Good, and doth no Evil: That he gives Life to Men, and all Creatures, and bereaves them of it again at his pleasure: That the Devil is the Author of all Evil and Mischief: That he sends all Sicknesses and Mishaps into the World; causeth all Quarrels, Thefts, and Murthers; and is the Original of Evil: Therefore they Sacrifice unto him, to appease him; they pray first to him, and name the Devil, before God: But they Pray also to a Third Power, under the Name of Dian Manang, that is, God, or Lord of Riches, which they acknowledge to be Gold; which when they see, or have in their Hand, with great Devotion they hold over their Heads, and kiss it. They believe there are innumerable An∣gels and Ministers of God, which do move the Heavens, the Starry Firma∣ment, and Planets; and govern the Air, Rain, Wind, Water, and Earth; guard Mens Lives and Habitations, and defend them from all Mischances in all their Enterprises, either on Water or Land, and in their Houses.

They make the Spirits or Devils, * 1.89 as well good as bad, Seven-fold: The first are the foremention'd Angels, call'd in their Language Malainghka, which are good Angels, and never do any Evil; every one with them is known by a particular Name, as Ramichail, Ragi-bourail, Ranail, Rafil, &c. that is, Michael, Gabriel, &c.

The Spirits of the second Order, call'd Coucoulampou, they say are beneath the Host of Angels, and invisible to Men; but nevertheless, Corporeal; That they dwell in solitary places, and make themselves known to all those to whom they would shew any particular Friendship; That there are Male and Female among them, and they marry one among another, beget Children, die after a long time, and as Men, expect after this Life Salvation or Damnation, accord∣ing as they have lived well or ill; That they eat without distinction all sorts of Animate or Inanimate Creatures, without suspicion of any of them being hurtful to their Bodily Wellfare; That they are subject to no Sickness, as void for the most part of any Accidents; yet they die, and their Lives are re∣strain'd within certain Limits of Time.

The fifth Rank or Order of Angels are call'd Angats, which signifies

a kind of Separation, or indeed the same with our Ghosts.

The sixth are call'd Saccara, and no other than the Devils or Evil-Spirits, which use to Possess and afflict Men, Women, and Children: They see them come like Fiery-Dragons, which Possess them eight, nay, fifteen days; when they are Possess'd by them, they give them an Assagay or Lance in their hands, with which they continually go about Singing and Dancing, with strange con∣tortions of their bodies. Men and Women of the Town flock round about the Possess'd Man or Woman, who also Dance and imitate those Postures by the beat of the Drum.

The seventh sort of Spirits are call'd Biles, being, as they say, an infinite number, but all under a Supream, who is the broacher of all evil; so that he seems to be Lucifer, or the Devil.

They believe, That God after the Creation of Heaven, Earth, and all Crea∣tures, Created Adam of Earth, and plac'd him in Paradise, which they imagine to be in the Moon, or in the Sun; and after his setling there, forbade him ei∣ther to eat or drink, because he had no need to do so; though they say there were four Rivers, one of Milk, one of Wine, one of Honey, and one of Oil; besides all sorts of Fruits in abundance. But the Devil (thus they relate the manner of the Fall) with subtilty and treachery, went to Adam, and said, Why eat ye not of all these good Fruits? Why do you not drink of that good Wine, and Milk, and taste this delicious Honey and Oil? Whereupon Adam answer'd, That God had for∣bidden him, which he durst not disobey.

The Devil thus driven away, staid about two hours; then came again to Adam, and said to him, That he came from God, to give him leave to eat of all that he had a mind to. Adam thus tempted to taste thereof, eat, and satisfi'd himself to the full; but after the digestion of the Food, he had a provocation and desire to ease himself, which of necessity he must do in Paradise; whereupon, instantly the Devil went, and complain'd to God against Adam's bewraying of his Eden; so that God for that cause drave him out of Paradise, and sent him into the Coun∣trey, where he gat a swelling in the Calf of his Leg, which continu'd six Moneths; and when the swelling brake, there came forth a young Maid, whereupon he sent the Angel Gabriel to God, to ask what he should do with that Maid; and the Angel return'd answer, That he should bring her up, and when she came to years of maturity, should Marry her; which he did, and nam'd her Ra∣bouna, that is, Eve.

After the current of some time, she lay In of two Sons, which being grown to a man-like stature, the Devil who hath a thousand Tricks, betray'd them in this manner; He gave them an Assagay or Javelin in their hands, arm'd with Iron at both ends, and rais'd a quarrel betwixt them two, so that they both took hold of the Assagays, and each took one end to pull it out of the others hands; but the Irons not fast Rivetted, by hard pulling came off, where each of them now having one, they stuck one another in the Belly, and both died of their Wounds. These two Brothers were Cain and Abel.

They add moreover, That Adam had many Children, which multiply'd ex∣ceedingly; but because Men were evil, and would no more know God, he sent a Floud or Deluge upon the Earth; having before commanded Noah to build a great Ship, to save himself, with all his Friends and Family, Women and Children, and many Beasts, a Male and Female of every sort; then God over∣whelm'd presently the whole face of the Earth, and all the remainder of Beasts, except four Mountains, that is to say, the Mountain Zaballicaf, in the North;

Zaballicatoure, in the South; Zaballiraf, in the West; and Zaballibazani, in the East: whereupon, nevertheless none could preserve their lives.

After the ending of the Floud, Noah came out of his Ship, went to dwell at Jerusalem, and came from thence to Mecha.

God (say they) gave four sorts of Writings to Noah, who embraced the Law; The first call'd Alifurcan, or Alcaron, was for Noah: The second Soratsi, for Moses: The third Zonboura, for David: And the fourth Alindzini, for Christ, whom they call Rahitsa. They say also, That Jesus Christ was sent by God into the world, without being begotten by any Man, but Born by the Virgin Mary; which brought him forth without pain, and remain'd a Virgin, calling her Ramariamia: That Christ was a Man, and God: That he was Crucifi'd by the Jews; but that God did not permit that he should die, but would have the Body of a Malefactor found in his place. They observe the Sa∣turday like the Jews, and not the Friday like the Mahumetans. If they would take in hand a Journey or matter of consequence, they take council of their Squilles, that is, of Geomancy or Black-Art, or rather of Auli, which they carry about with them in small Boxes. They offer great Sacrifices of Beasts, call'd Mitaha, at the entrance upon new Built Houses; at the Harvest of their Fruits of the Field; their Wives being with Child; at the lusty growing of their Plants; the Burial of their Dead, and Marriage: Fast-Days, by them call'd Ramahana, or Miafauthe, and by the Turks, Ramedan, which they observe with great Ceremony, but not in any set Moneths, but now in one, and then in an∣other, according to the position and order of the year.

They Circumcise their Children with great Formality commonly in May, * 1.90 when it is Fridays Year, for by the days of the Week they reckon their Years; especially the People of Anossy and Matatane; for all the other Circumcise at all times: To the performance whereof come all the Friends in Consanguinity and Alliance of the Child to the Circumcision into the Town, to which the Parents bring Wine, and present an Ox or Heifer for every Infant; but poor people less.

The Men play and exercise with Assagays or Lances, among which the Drums, whom they stile Ompivango, beat the Azontake or Drums, made of a hol∣lowed Trunk of a Tree, cover'd over with two Skins; the one of an Ox, and the other of a Goat, upon which they Tabor at one end with a Stick, and at the other with their Hand; the Female Relations Dance round about those who exercise with Assagays, and use divers Gestures and strange Postures; These Pranks finish'd, all the young Company Dance and Sing again; then the Ma∣ster of the Town (who must celebrate the Circumcision) beginning to drink of the Wine of Honey or Meath, follow to guzzle as much as possible, for they that Drunk most, are the greatest honor to the Assembly. In the Evening, Oxen are kill'd to eat in the day, sometimes to the number of two hundred. The next Morning (the Feast-day) every one remains quiet; but the Fathers and Mothers sometime make their Children ready in the mean time, and the Mo∣thers sleep that night with their Children, in the Lapa, that is, the Church, be∣ing a place erected a Moneth before, with divers Ceremonies, by the Fathers and Uncles of the Children, to be Circumcised. No Father may approach the Mother that night, nor know any woman; and no Woman, Maid, or Man, who have used incontinency, must dare to joyn himself in person at the Cir∣cumcision, for they are possess'd with this Superstitious Opinion, that then the blood of the Fore-skin of the Child will not stench, but the Child die: Nei∣ther may any person present wear any red thing on his body at that time, or if they do, it must be very close from sight.

[illustration]

Early, at break of Day, Men, Women, Maids, and all others, Bathe them∣selves, and beating their Drums at Sun-rise, chop up some short Prayers, and the Circumciser himself utters aloud, Salama, Zahanhare Zahomissabots Anauhanau, Nambouatsitangho, amini Tombuc, Zahomitoulou bouzonhamiuau, &c. Which is, Be thou Magnified, O my God; I draw near with my Prayers to thee, thou hast Created our Hands and our Feet; I beseech thee forgiveness of our Sins; I kneel down before thee; I do Circumcise these Children this day, &c.

Afterwards they bring the Children into the Lapa, adorn'd and dress'd with Corals and Bracelets, Pretious Stones, and other Ornaments about their Necks: Here they stay till the tenth hour of the Morning, with an empty body, which they can discern by the shadow of a Man in the Sun, standing straight upright; for they measure the shadow with their Feet, which they call Liha, or Pas, which being nine of their own Feets length, is the time of the Circumcision. Then the Drums beat, and the Circumciser puts on his Garments, and binds a Fillet of great strong white Cotton-Yarn to his left Arm, to scour his Knife. At last, every Father takes his Child in his Arms, and going a Procession through the Lapa, passing in at the Western Door, and out again at the Eastern, ten by ten, one after another twice: After some short pause, they begin two other for the Oxen which are for the Sacrifice; and with the left hand of the Child touch their right Horn, as they lie upon the ground, with their Feet ty'd together: Then all the people are bid to clear the place, and a large Ring made; whereupon the Circumciser appears with his Knife, to cut off the Fore-skin of every Child, which the Uncle of the Child receives, and lays into the white and yealk of a Hens-Egg which he holds in his hand; but a Rhoandrian or Anakandrian kills the Cattel, and cuts for every Child a Hens throat, and lets the Blood drop upon every Wound; and another puts upon it the Juyce of a certain Herb call'd Hota, a kind of Clover-Leaf. If the Child be a Slave, and hath no Uncle, then the Fore-skin is thrown upon the ground; This day they keep so holy, that no Sport is made, nor none then drink beyond the measure of hillarity.

The Priests call'd by them Ombyasses, and by the Moors, Marabauts; are of two sorts, that is, Ombiasses Ompanorats, and Ombyasses Omptifiquili; the Ompanorats are Scribes, who can write Arabick very Expertly; they have many Books, where∣in are some pieces of the Alcaron: most of them understand the Arabian Tongue, which they teach, together with Writing.

Several Offices are conferr'd upon the Ombyasses, Ompanorats, which very much agree with the Church-Offices among Christians; as Male, Ombyasse, Tibou, Mouladzi, Faquihi, Catibou, Loulamaba, Sabaha, Talisman. Male is a Clerk, which onely teacheth to Write: Ombyasse, a Master of Arts: Tibou, an under Dea∣con: Mouladzi, a Deacon: Faquihi, a Priest: Catibou, a Bishop: Loulamaba, an Arch-Bishop: Sabaha, a Pope.

These People cure the Sick, make Hiridzi, or Talismans, or Massasser-Robes, which are certain Charms or Spells, written with Arabick Letters, which they sell to the Grandees and Rich men, with promise that they shall be freed from a thousand Mischiefs, Sicknesses, Thunder, Fire, Enemies, yea from Death it self; though they know not how to preserve themselves from it.

These Cheaters make great gain of those Letters, receiving for them Beasts, Gold, Silver, Clothes, and all Conveniencies. The people stand in great fear of these Ombyasses, and hold them for Sorcerers and Witches; as also the Gran∣dees of the Countrey, make use of them against the French, but without any effect; alledging, that their Sorcery can do nothing upon them, because they eat Swines-Flesh, and are of another Religion. It chanc'd, that these Ombyasses close under the Fort of the French (to drive them away) had brought Baskets full of Papers written with Arabick Letters, Eggs laid upon a Friday, fill'd over with Characters, and Arabick Writing, Earthen Pots never yet set upon the Fire, written upon within and without, Biers to carry the Dead, written upon, Ca∣noos, Girdles, Scissers, Pinsers of Iron to pluck the Hairs out; In brief, nothing was omitted that they thought expedient for the Work, yet without any other effect, than the Pastime of the French at their ridiculous Vanity.

These Ombyasses Ompanorats, are the usual Physitians who visit the Sick, and give them Medicines, being Decoctions of Herbs and Roots. They also Cure Wounds, and write Charms with Arabick Characters, which moisten'd with Water, they hang about the Necks and Middles of the Sick, to expel all Sick∣nesses and evil Influences. They make likewise Geomantick Images, to find out the time of the Disease, and to discover the Remedies fit for the Malady. If the Sick recover not as they expect, they acquaint him that he wants somewhat, and so set upon the Work anew, either till he die, or grow well of himself.

The Ombyasses, in the mean time, get both from the Patient and his Friends all they require, as Gold, Silver, Corral, Cows, Clothes, Girdles, and other things.

The Ombyasses Ompanorats, among the People of Matatane keep publick Schools to teach Children.

The Omptifiquili are commonly Negro's and Anakandrians, which undertake the practice of Geomancy, or Soothsaying, in the Countrey Language call'd Squi∣li, and do such like Feats, as in Europe the Books of Geomancy express; onely they erect their Schemes or Work upon a Plank, strew'd over with Sand, whereupon they make Figures with their finger, setting down the Day, Hour, Moneth, Planet, and Signs that have Dominion over the Hour, according to which they Presage.

Strange things are attempted in this Art, yet they seldom hit upon the truth,

but rather judge blindly by guess; nevertheless they are esteem'd by all.

There is another sort of Ombyasses among the Negro's, which the Sick also send to, yet can neither Write nor Read, but make onely Geomantick Figures, and use Crystals, Topazes, Eagle-Stones, Amethysts, and others, which they call by the general name of Filaha; making the people believe, God sends them these Stones by the Thunder, to work Cures by; which perswasion hath taken so deep root in the hearts of the Islanders, that they cannot be drawn to believe the contrary.

They have great glistering Crystals, but foul and cloudy, which they say are Terachs, that is, having others within: when they make Figures, they have one of these Stones in the corner of their Tables, saying, That it hath power to bring activity into their fingers.

Vincent le Blank, and Casper de Saint Bernardino, * 1.91 set down six Kingdoms in this Island, which Kings continually wage War one against the other: But Marcus Paulus Venetus affirms, That in his time it was govern'd by four Cheques; but at this day every Territory hath a peculiar Lord or Dian, who usually sets over every Town under his Jurisdiction a particular Philoubei, that is, Bailiff of the Town.

In the whole there is not a foot breadth of Land but belongs to some Lord or other, so that it is an error and mistake to say, that every one may make use of as much Land as he will.

There are not found in this whole Island any written Laws, but all is done according to the Law of Nature, being three-fold; Massindili, or the Princes Law; Massinpah, the natural Law of particular people, which is no other than their own way; and Massintane, the Law or Custom of the Coun∣trey.

The Princes Law, or Massindili is a compound word of Massin, that signifies Law or Custom; and Hadili that signifies Command, being nothing else but ar∣bitrary Will, grounded nevertheless upon Reason, consisting in the doing every one Right, to determine differences; such as have done others wrong, to punish them in their Estates or Goods. A Thief must recompence his theft fourfold, if he have wherewithal, if not, he must pay for it with his life, or be his Slave which he stole the Goods from.

The Natural Law, or Massinpah, concerns every ones particular method in Working, Speaking, Merchandize, Gesture, and manner of Life.

Massintane, is the settled Custom of the Countrey, not onely there, but in more civilized Places, held for a firm Law in all Cases. This here extends to the way of Planting necessary Provisions, Building of Towns, Wars, publick Re∣joycings, Dancings, Exercises of Arms, and many other matters.

The Antiquity of this Massintane hath so prevail'd, that the Law of the Prince stands upon no other foundation, so that it cannot be alter'd; nor indeed will they alter it for any cause whatsoever: That which they have receiv'd from hand to hand, by Tradition from their Fore-fathers, they esteem more than any thing else that can be taught them: As for instance, in the manner of Til∣ling their Ground, if any should tell them, that the Earth must be digg'd deep, or stirr'd and broken with a Plough, they would not hearken thereto, but in∣stantly reply, Their Ancestors us'd no such Custom.

The Person that is hurt or wrong'd may do himself right, without bring∣ing the Offender before his Lord; for they make no more of killing a Thief, than they do about a venomous Serpent, or other Vermin.

Perjur'd Persons and breakers of their Oath, are punish'd with heavy Pe∣nalties, and the Women sometime kill'd by their Husbands for it.

When a Marry'd Woman departs from her Husband, and hath a Child by another man, that Child must belong to the Marry'd Husband, till the Woman (without consent) Marrieth another; to which nevertheless he will not agree, till his Tacq, that is, the Brides Portion which he paid to the Womans Father at his Marriage, be restor'd to him again.

These arise also continual quarrels and differences among particular people upon Trifles; as either about the Cattel, which run into one or others Torraks, and spoil or eat up their Rice, or Slander and wrong; or if one Neger steps over another lying on the Ground, or treads upon his Legs without speaking, Jossles against another unawares; for all which he is liable to be punish'd by the Judge.

The Island of Saint Mary, otherwise called Nossi Hibrahim.

THe Isle of St. Mary, commonly call'd Nossi Hibrahim, that is, Abraham's-Isle, lieth from the sixteenth to the seventeenth degree South-Latitude, opposite to the River Manangare, and stands the nearest from Mada∣gascar, two small Miles, and at the farthest four; containing in length from South to North, about eleven; and in breadth, from East to West, full two Miles.

To the South of this Island, lieth another small one, in the shape of a Tre-Angle, separated by a Channel of thirty yards broad, and two foot deep in some places, and in others deeper. This Island hath curious Meadows with Grass, where the Cattel of St. Maries Isle go to Pasture.

The Island of St. Mary stands encompass'd with Rocks, over which, at the time of High-Water the Canoos go, but at Low-Tide they are dangerous, within a foot, or half a foot of the Surface. On the Shore are found Rocks of white Corral, which the Negro's seek, and sell to the French.

The whole is cut thorow by small Rivers and Springs, by which means, to∣gether with its natural fatness, the Ground proves infinitely fertile, and all over Sown with Rice, whereof sometimes they gather two Crops in a year; there are also large Sugar-Canes, Pease, Bananoes, Ananassen; and better to Bake than in any place of Madagascar.

The Air is very moist, so that scarce one day in the year passeth without Rain, and sometimes it Showres six days together without ceasing.

The Cattel are very large and fat, feeding at pleasure.

On the Easterly Shore much Ambergreece hath been found, of which the Negro's make Burnt-Offerings on the A Mounouques, or Burying-places of their Fore-fathers. Besides, several sorts of Gums which they use for sweet Scents; and likewise Taccamahacca in great abundance. There grows a Tree, by the Natives call'd Thionti, and its Fruit Voathions, which is no sooner fallen from the same, but it Roots in the Earth and makes such a close Thicket, that it is impossible to go thorow it.

There are about ten or twelve Villages Inhabited since the French have had their abode there; so that the Governor of Antongil, which used formerly to War against this Island continually, dare not come thither for fear of the French: The whole contains about six hundred Inhabitants, which call them∣selves Zaffe-Hibrahim, that is, Children of Abraham. The Chief Commander hath to name Raignasse, or Raniassa, Son of Ratsiminon, that is, Head, because onely acknowledged by them as Head of the Stock of Abraham, in this Island and Ma∣dagascar.

The Islanders maintain themselves by Planting of Rice, Ignames, Bananoes, Su∣gar-Canes, Pease, and Beans, and Fishing for Houzites, a sort of Fish, which they carry to sell at St. Lawrence; paying to the Governor the fifth part for Tri∣bute, which also they do of Rice, and other Plants.

These Islanders will enter into no League with the Christians, yet Trade with them, because it seems they have retain'd somewhat of the Antient Ju∣daism.

The Island of Maskareigne, otherwise called BOURBON.

THe Island of Maskareigne, or Maskarenhas, so call'd from the first Disco∣verer, a Portuguese, out of the Family of Maskarenhas, by some call'd Apollime, but by the French from the houses of Bourbon, Isle de Bourbon; who in the Year Fifteen hundred sixty nine, by Flakour then Commander of the Island of Madagascar, for the French East-India Company, took possession of it for them.

It lieth to the East of Madagascar, in one and twenty degrees and a half South-Latitude; being fifteen Leagues long and ten broad, and full eight days Journey in circumference.

There is not one convenient Haven, by reason of the Rocks on the Shore, which makes the coming of Ships to this Island oftentimes dangerous; but there are several Roads, the best of which lieth West, and North-East; the next is on the Northside, and another on the Southside, surrounded with Rocks, with an entrance scarce wide enough for one Ship to come in at; near which the French have built a Chappel for St. Paul.

At the Southside of this Island stands a Mountain which continually Burns, and Vomits out Fire; as another on the Island Del Fuoga, one of the Cape de Verd Islands, and the Mountain Hekla in Ysland; from the South to the Eastside lieth a Tract of Land of twenty Miles, quite burnt up by the sultry heat of the Air; however, this Countrey doth seem to have been very good formerly.

The Burning begins from the South-Point, and takes its course aloft over the Mountains: As you travel cross thorow the Countrey, from the South to the West, you may find a small Tract of Land of about six Miles, wherein is a Lake, whence issues a small River, which runs through all the Countrey.

The Air, though very hot, hath the repute of being healthful, as receiving frequent cooleness from the fresh Breezes arising out of the Mountains. It hath several Rivulets, Brooks, and Springs, which along the Cliffs, and

the gaping of the Mountains, pour their Water from one quarter into the other.

The Rivers by the French discover'd on the Coast, and flowing into the Sea, are, the grand River Du Galet, the East-River, Stone-Cliffe River, and the Ri∣ver of St. John, St. Steven, and St. Giles: It lieth totally desolate, notwith∣standing the French have sometimes endeavor'd to have Planted it with some Colonies of People.

This Island boasts an exceeding fertility both of Plants and Beasts: for first, there grows Tobacco as good as any Countrey can afford, abundance of Aloes, Cubebs, white-tail Pepper, Ebony, and other Wood, serviceable to build Hou∣ses and Ships, Trees which afford well-scented Gums, Benzoia, and others, be∣sides many Palmito's and other Fruit-Trees.

They cannot complain for want either of Fish or Flesh, the Rivers plenti∣fully affording the one, and the Land the other, viz. wild Swine, very great Sea and Land-Turtles, wild Pigeons and Drones, the fairest Paraketo's in the world, and many other sorts of Fowl: The Sea-shores are full of Goats, which are delicate Meat; yet the Flesh of the wild Swine exceeds all the other for daintiness and wholsomness, according to the relation of those French of Madagascar, which were by the Governor banish'd three years into this Island, where they preserved themselves, onely by this Flesh, without either Bisket or Rice, or tasting any other tame or wild Beast, or Fowl. During their three years continuance there, they averred, that they perceived not the least spice of either Ague or Fever, neither had pain in the Head or Teeth, notwithstanding they went continually naked, bare-footed, and nothing on their Heads; yea, some of them coming sick thither, immediately recover'd health.

In the Year Sixteen hundred fifty four, a French-man call'd Antonis Thaureau, went with leave of the French Governor of Madagascar, with seven other of his own Nation, and six Blacks, to settle themselves in this Island: After a Journey of twelve days arriving there, they seated themselves at the side of a certain Lake, which mixes its Water with the Sea, at a place where a great Bay lieth, a convenient Road for ships, in the West-North-West part of the Island.

They took along with them from Madagascar five Cows, with one Calf, and one Steer, which mixed themselves with five and thirty other very fine and fat Steers, which were come of those that had been put on Shore five years be∣fore. They immediately built Huts for their abode, and busied themselves in making of Gardens, and Planting of Tobacco, Melons, and all sorts of Cod-Fruits: but when the Tobacco was almost ripe, the same, with their Huts, was ruin'd by a Heuricane; so that they were necessitated to Build and Plant anew. In the mean time while the Season of Planting came on again, being in October, November, and December, (for their Harvest is in April) the aforesaid Thaureau, with some of the other, concluded to take a Journey round about the Island to discover the same exactly, and to take notice of the Countrey; but they found almost nothing but Plants of Aloes: after two days Journey they came to the Sea-coast, which runs from the Point in the North, to the other in the South, five Miles long, convenient for Habitation, and very de∣lightful and pleasant Meadows, water'd by seven very fine Rivers, which take their original out of a great Lake, surrounded with Mountains, where the Standard with the Arms of France were set up, by the command of Flaccourt.

After a stay of two years and eight moneths, without receiving any relief from Madagascar, and seeing no other opportunity to get from thence, they be∣took

themselves to an English Vessel, which put in there in the Year Sixteen hundred fifty eight, and in the Moneth of May, together with their six Blacks, came to the English Fort of Maderespartan, on the Coast of Cormandel, or Narsinge, a Mile from the City St. Thomas the Apostle of India, where they arrived on the twelfth day of the following Moneth, with a great deal of Aloes, Tobacco, and Benzoin, in hopes to dispose of those Commodities there; but arriving, they found the contrary, and that one Roll of Tobacco was enough for the whole Coast to make Snuff of, by reason of the little use of it: And likewise the Aloes prov'd a Drug, because it grew there also.

The Island of St. Apollonie.

THe Island of St. Apollonie, which Francois Caucha seems to take for that of Mauritius, some Chards place forty Miles Eastward of Mascareigne; but Flaccourt in his Description of Madagascar, makes it a distinct thing.

The Island of Mauritius, or Cerne.

THe Island of Mauritius, so call'd by the Hollanders, for the Honour and Memory of Maurice, Prince of Orange, a Branch from the House of Nassaw, not well knowing, and uncertain of its proper Name. Some wrongfully hold it to be the Cerne of Pliny, and placed in eighteen Degrees and thirty Minutes of South-Latitude, whereas, according to Caucha, it is call'd, The Island of Apollonie, and lieth in the Elevation of one and twenty Degrees South-Latitude, close by Mascaronhas.

The Hollanders first touched upon it in the Year Fifteen hundred ninety eight, the eighteenth of September, in their second Voyage to the East-Indies, under the Command of the Admiral Jacob Cornelius van Nek. Its Circumfe∣rence they guess at fifteen Leagues, affording a Haven and convenient Road, but remains void both of Men and Beasts, except Cats.

The Air seems to be good and wholsom; and there is a River found, which takes its orignal out of the Mountains, whereof there are many towards the Sea; yet within the Countrey are very delightful Plains. By reason of the many and high Mountains, the whole lies almost continually cover'd with Snow; and oftentimes there doth such Mists arise from them, that a Man can see no farther than just down before him. The Ground lies very stony, and so overgrown with wild and unfruitful Trees, that it is scarce passable. Among them are found many Palmito's and other Trees, with a green Bark, and Wood underneath as black as Pitch, which some have taken for the right Ebony; and other Trees, whose Wood appears of a deep red, or very yellow, like Wax.

Fowl are here innumerable, and so tame and fearless, that they will suffer a Man almost to touch them, as Pigeons, Turtle-Doves, Cranes, gray and speckled Parrots, and strange Birds as big as Swans, with thick Heads, where∣on are Skins like Lappets: In stead of Wings (for they have none) they have upon their sides onely three or four black Quills, and behind, in stead of a Tail,

four or five small Feathers, or curl'd Plumes, standing somewhat higher than the other: they have large and thick Feet, with a great and ugly Bill and Eyes; and have commonly a Stone in their Maw as big as ones Fist: the longer the Flesh is boyl'd the harder it grows, except it be the Breast, which is very good to eat. The Sea-men that first saw them, gave them the name of Loath∣som Fowls. Bats as big, or rather bigger than Pigeons, with a Head like a Cat, flie there in great numbers, hanging in the Trees, and doing much hurt to other Fowls. Another sort of these are hairy all over their Bodies, like Monkies or Cats, and therefore some have call'd them Flying Cats, for they are as big as a Hen or Goose: such as these are found in several places of Asia, as in the King∣dom of Mogor, in the Territory of Casmir, in Suratta, and neighboring Islands, and likewise in Brasile: they keep in the closest Woods, and hang with their Claws in the day-time on the Branches of Trees, and shew more like hanging Bags than Beasts or Fowls. The China's in the Province of Xensi, eat their Flesh with a great appetite, and report it better and more savoury than that of a Hen: in the nights they miserably torment Cows, Goats and Sheep, by suck∣ing out their Blood.

Fish may be plentifully taken in the Rivers within the Countrey, as without in the Sea, with little pains, two or three Tubs full at one haling; among which the ignorant Sea-men sometimes catch a sort of Fishes of a red colour, but so poysonous, that he that eats of it, hath for some days together a most intolerable pain.

There are also Sea and Land-Turtles, but the best not pallatable, and of an uncouth aspect; but of the first, some have three hundred Eggs in their Bodies, as big as Hen-Eggs, and Shells wherein ten or twelve men can stand, and one of them alive (as they say) can carry seven men.

The Island of Diego Rodrigue, or Diego Rois, and the Islands Primieras, Angoxos, or Angoises, and Veiques.

THe Islands of Diego Rois, and according to the Portuguese, Diego Rodrigue, or Rodrigo, lieth in the Altitude of twenty Degrees, two and twenty Miles from Madagascar in the East, and not inhabited.

The Islands in Portuguese call'd Ilhas Primieras, that is, The first Islands, lie over against the Coast of Sofale, in sixteen Degrees South-Latitude; and the Islands of Angozas, to the number of four, hard by the Coast of Mozambique.

Beyond the Cape of St. Sebastian, on the Coast of Sofale, towards the North, in four and twenty Degrees South-Latitude, appear several Isles, some bigger, some less, but all call'd Veiques, nine Miles from the Continent, and eight, ten, and twelve Miles distant from each other.

These yield Rice, Mille, and a great many Cattel. The Sea-shore offers Ambergreece, which the Moors carry to sell to other Places; and likewise great and small Pearls, which the ignorance of the finders spoil with boyling.

The Inhabitants drive a Trade with those of the Main Land, and are all Mahumetans.

The Islands of Comorre, or Comarre, and Gomara.

THese by a general Name call'd Comarre, or Gomara, and by Vincent de Witt taken for the Thieves Island, lie between Madagascar and the Main Land of Mozambique. Linschot saith there is onely one; Sanutus averrs them to be three; Pyrard, and the foremention'd Vincent, five; others eight, and some for four, as Molaloa, or Molaile; Angazesia, or Augazia; Ivany, or Amtuane; * 1.92 and Maota, or Majotta; which last three lie close together, but Angazesia, some∣what Northerly, and Molaloa in twelve Degrees and twenty Minutes; Angezia lieth North-west, five Miles from Molaloa, with its farthest Point in eleven Degrees and five Minutes, and with the nearest, in eleven Degrees and six Mi∣nutes. The South-side lieth very high out of the Water; Ivanny hath its situa∣tion Eastward of Majotta and Molaloa; both which have a good Coast. All these Islands, but chiefly Molaloa, have abundance of Cows, Oxen, Goats, Sheep, with great and broad Tails, Coneys, Hens, and other Fowls, several sorts of Fruits, as sowre and sweet Oranges, great and small Citrons, Coco-Nuts, Bana∣nossen, Honey, Betel-Leaves, and according to Sanutus, Ginger, Sugar, and Rice, which boyl'd, gives a Violet-colour.

Moors Angazesia, which drive a Trade with Beasts and Fruits in many places on the Coasts, and the Eastern Islands, in exchange for Calico's and other Clothes, and Cotton Stuffs.

Their Bread is made of Chesnuts, Baked in an Oven, with a little Honey; and their Drink Palm-Wine, and the Juice of Coco-Nuts. They never let their Women be seen with any Strangers but with permission of the Sultan.

Many amongst them can Speak and Write Arabick, some also Portuguese, which they learn at Mozambique, where they come to Trade with Barks of thir∣ty or forty Tuns apiece.

The Houses in Molaloa are built of Stone, and daub'd over with Mortar, with low Roofs cover'd with Boards, and Leaves over them.

Angazesia stands divided among the several Lords; that of Ivanny one pecu∣liar Governour claims, by the Title of Sultan, who gave Molaloa to his Chil∣dren, viz. two Sons and one Daughter, each of whom, during their lives, held their parts severally.

The Sultan keeps a great Train, according to his manner, being continu∣ally attended by fifty Men, and his Habit a red and blew Cloth hanging over his Knees down to his Feet, wearing a Turbant; from which his Subjects vary little.

Both the Grandees and meaner sort of People chew continually a mixture of Oysters-shells, and Nuts Areka, with Betel-Leaves, which cleanseth and fast∣neth the Teeth.

The Island of Ferdinando Po.

NOt far from Guinee lie four Islands, viz. of Ferdinando Po, Princes Island, St. Thomas, and Anobon. The Island of Ferdinando Po, the Name of the first Discoverer, who himself call'd it Ilhas das Formosa, that is, The Fair Island, lieth in three Degrees and a half North-Latitude, between the High-land of Amboyses and Rio des Camarones, about four Miles and a half from the Main Land. It seems the biggest of all the four, although St. Thomas come near it; rises very high, and produces the Root Mandihoka, Tobacco, Rice, and Fruit-Trees.

The People are wild, barbarous, and deceitful, Govern'd by seven Lords, continually Warring one against another.

No People of Europe come thither to Trade, because the Inhabitants upon their Landing make away with all speed, so that they onely put in there for fresh Water.

The Princes Island.

THe Princes Island, or Ilha de Principe, so call'd in Portuguese, because a Portuguese Prince did find it out first of all, being the smallest of the four; it lieth in two Degrees North-Latitude, thirty Miles from the Main Land of Africa, and about four and twenty Northward of St. Thomas.

On this Island blows a more serene and wholsomer Air than on that of St. Thomas. On the Shore appears a little Town, containing about two hun∣dred Houses, and defended with Breast-works three Foot high against any Onset; within which stand four small Cannon, which the Inhabitants have formerly gotten from some Shipwrack.

The Countrey hath many Trees, most of which produce Oranges, Lemons, Banano's, Coco-Nuts, and such like. There are also Sugar-Canes, and Cotton, of which the Women Weave their own wearing Clothes; and Mandihoka, and here and there a Vine.

The Inhabitants are Portuguese, but few in number, being but about thirty or forty; Mulato's, Negro's and Slaves, three thousand, which work in the Sugar-Mills, and plant Rice, Tobacco, Mille, and other Fruits.

The Island of Anaboon, or Anabon.

ANabon, or Anaboon, which signifieth New, or Good Year, so call'd perhaps by the Portuguese, because discover'd on a New-years-day: it lieth in one Degree and fifty Minutes South-Latitude, or as others, in one Degree and a half, about five and twenty Miles from St. Thomas, and five and forty from Cabo de Lopez Gonzalves, on the Main Coast. It takes in Circumference (according to Pyrard) about five or six French Miles, and in length not above

half a Mile. The Harbor appears at the North-side, but very dangerous, by reason of the Shoals and Rocks.

This Island hath a wholsom Air, many Fountains, Springs, and Brooks, with fresh Water, onely a little brackish at the New and Full-Moon, by rea∣son of the high flowing of the Sea. It rises with Mountains, whose aspiring tops seem to kiss the Clouds, and are commonly cover'd with Snow. The Hills and Dales prove fruitful in all sorts of Plants, and affords the Eye a plea∣sant and delightful sight. The Shores of the Brooks stand beset with Palm-Trees, (out of which the Inhabitants extract the often mention'd Palm-Wine) Ignames, Injames, Potato's, Banano's, Ananassen, Orange-Trees, Tamarind-Trees, Sugar-Canes and Cotton-Trees; also Rice, Maiz, or Turkish Wheat, several sorts of Turkish Beans, black Physick-Nuts, and many other Trees and Plants.

There are many wild Swine, Stags, Goats, Hens, Pigeons, black and white Cranes, and other Fowl.

The adjoyning Sea produces many sorts of Fishes and Oysters.

Mercator, and some others, make this Island waste and desolate, contrary to the truth, for 'tis inhabited, though but meanly, there being some years ago a few Portuguese, with fifty or sixty Blacks, which all liv'd by tilling the Ground, and Fishing. The Netherlanders found in the Year Sixteen hundred and five, in their Voyage to the East-Indies, under the Admiral Matelief, two hundred Blacks on this Island.

The Town stands surrounded with a Breast-work for Defence, and con∣tains about a hundred Houses, built of Canes, besides some few of Wood, be∣longing to the Portuguese.

The Blacks go stark naked both Men and Women, * 1.93 having onely a Cotton Cloth before their Privacies. The Women carry their Children on their Backs, and when they will give them Suck, they throw their Breasts over their Shoulders, for they have them very great.

The Portuguese have the Command of it, who send thither a Vice-Roy. * 1.94

All the Inhabitants, both Blacks and others, embrace the Christian Religion, * 1.95 converted by the endeavor of the Portuguese.

The Island of St. Thomas.

THe Island of St. Thomas, in Portuguese, St. Thomee, because first of all discover'd on that Saints Day; yet Thevet calls it Santas Honore, and the Barqarians, Ponkas; it lieth in the Ethiopian Sea, right under the Equi∣noctial Line, (which comes through the City, and the great Church, and there∣fore no Latitude hath been ascribed to it) and not far from the Cape of Lopez Gonsalvez. It bears an Oval form about thirty Miles in Circumference, and in length and breadth twelve Miles.

The chief City, call'd Pavosan, or Pavaose, through which run two small Rivers, hath its situation on an even place, on the North-side of the Bay, some∣what more longer than round, and about half a days walking in compass; containing about fifteen hundred Houses, every one ten Stories high. On that side towards the Sea-coast defended with some Breast-works of Stone, which the Portuguese Governor raised in the Year Sixteen hundred and seven, commanding every one that passed backwards and forwards by the City, to

bring one Stone towards the Building. The Houses are erected of white and hard Wood like Oak, which grows there on the Spot; before, behind, and also on the top, cover'd with Planks made fast together. There stand onely on the whole Island three Stone Houses, in one of which the Governor dwelleth.

The City boasts of three Churches, whereof the biggest is intitled Conceptio, or, The Church of the Conception of the Virgin Mary; next, the Church of Isabella, whereto adjoyns an Hospital, and the Church of St. Sebastian, a small one, standing by the Castle. But several other Churches stand without the City, as St. Anthonies, two Musquets shot distant; and somewhat nearer, St. Johns: then you may see the Church of Maitre de Dios, or The Mother of God; about a Mile from the City, towards the South-east; and about two Miles from it towards the East, Trinitado, or The holy Trinity; and about three Miles towards the South-east, the Church of St. Anna.

The Castle of St. Sebastian, * 1.96 seated on an out-lying Corner, at the North-side of the City and of the Bay, is a handsom Building of Stone, to the heighth of twenty five Foot, and both of it self, and by the conveniency of the place whereon it stands, seems almost impregnable: The Garrison within con∣sists of a hundred Soldiers, well stor'd and provided with Ammunition and Victuals; besides, continual Supplies are, and may be brought thither by Sea without hindrance.

The Ground is moistned by several Brooks and Rivers of clear and fresh Water, to their great enriching.

On the middle of this Island rises a Woody Mountain, continually cover'd with Snow, whence divers Brooks and Streams draw their originals.

The Air is very hot and untemperate, moist, unwholsom, inimical to the People of Europe, who seldom attain there to the age of fifty years, whereas the Natives, a People that have but little Blood, oftentimes arrive to above a hundred. Some affirm, that a young Man in his growth coming thither; shall never grow bigger, but always remain at his first Stature; and that a dead Corps laid in the Ground, will rot and decay in four and twenty hours.

The cause of this unwholsomness hath been imagin'd to proceed from the over-great Heats, and damp Fogs. Some have reported, that this malign in∣temperature doth not spread over the whole, but confin'd chiefly to the City, and occasion'd by the low situation thereof: for from the Rain-water which falls down abundantly from the Hills to the Valleys, are exhal'd noysom Va∣pors, which afterwards fall down in the Evenings and Mornings, with an of∣fensive influence; whose fume or dewy stream receiv'd into the Body, corrupts and irritates the Blood: for the avoiding which direful hazards at those times, the Portuguese there resident keep within their Houses.

But this Air loses some of these ill qualities in June, July, and August, by rea∣son of the South-east and South-west dry and cool Winds; which blowing over from the Coast of Ethiopia, refresh the Countrey, and clear the Air, to the great advantage of Strangers, although the Natives receive detriment thereby.

These Islanders, as all others under the Equinoctial, have two Winters, not in respect of Cold, but onely of Moistures, one in March, and another in Sep∣tember; at which time the Sun shines from the Vertical Point upon the Inhabi∣tants Heads, without making a Shadow either to the North or South; which happens twice a year at Noon.

The reason of this double Winter seems to proceed from the violent attra∣ctions of Heat, caus'd by the scorching beams of the Sun, which so fill the Air

with watry Exhalations, that the Sun, as clouded therewith, shines not out, and so those dusky Vapors dissolve themselves in great and continuing Rains, the onely sign of Winter, the over-heated Air hardly chill'd thereby.

The rainy Moneths continue from December to April, when all the low Land lies under Water. Our Summer-Moneths, May, June, July, and August, make their Spring; and with them Summer begins when the Sun first enters into the beginning of Capricorn, and continues till it comes to the beginning of Aries, that is, in December, January, February, and the beginning of March; and then the Air is very moist and hot, so that Foreigners keep themselves in places under ground, yet oftentimes can neither escape great Sicknesses or Death; where∣as the Natives being of a cold and dry Constitution, live in good health: yet when the heat arrives at the heighth, it makes the Inhabitants themselves so faint, that they can scarce go, and the Ground so hot, that they must wear Shooes with double Soles and thick Corks, to save their Feet from scorching.

The Sicknesses which proceed from the untemperate heat, * 1.97 are burning and pestilential Fevers, seizing Strangers in eight days time, first by shivering and coldness, afterwards with heat through all their Limbs, for two hours toge∣ther, and with such violence, that the infected Party oftentimes on the fourth, or seventh, or at longest on the fifteenth day, dies; but if he out-live that time, he grows well again on a sudden, and so may continue, except he prejudice himself by gluttony or drinking; for the best Medicine is a moderate Diet, to eat little and fast much; besides, to purge the Body with Juice of Cassia Fi∣stula, and sometimes to breath a Vein, and take away superfluous Blood.

The Sickness call'd Bitios de Ku, ranges here also, being cured with Juice of Lemons, as before related.

The Pox is so customary to the Natives, that they make nothing of it, but suddenly and with great ease cure it, by means of Quicksilver, yet proves mor∣tal to many Strangers; who ought therefore to be very careful how they med∣dle with the black Women, by reason of the inequality of their Constitutions.

The Dropsie is very frequent, which they cure by applying outwardly the Oyl of Coco-Nuts, and the Juice of several Herbs, of which the Negro's have good knowledge.

Above a Century of years since, the Kings of Portugal hearing of the fruit∣fulness of the Soil, sent some over thither, who died through the unwholsom∣ness of the Air: Again he sent others, who went first into Guinee, from thence to Angola, and at last setled on this Island, that they might as it were Pedetentim, step by step, be enabled to endure the evil temperature thereof.

Some have reported, that John King of Portugal sold the Jews for Slaves, up∣on their refusing to embrace the Christian Religion, and Baptizing their Chil∣dren, sent them thither; from whence the Islanders seem to be extracted.

No small number of sick and dead Men had the Netherlanders on this Island, when in the Year Sixteen hundred forty one, under the Command of Admiral Jol, otherwise call'd Houtebeen, they overcame this Island: for there scarce re∣main'd twelve sound and healthful Men in a Company; and Jol himself, with most of the other Commanders died: Nay, the Distemper came at last with such wide paces amongst them, that there scarce remain'd any to be upon the Watch, or stand Sentinells, and not Sea-men enough to Man two Ships: where∣fore they sent to Prince Maurice in Brasile for Soldiers, Provisions, and Wine for refreshment. Most of them died of great pains in their Heads; some of the Gri∣ping in the Guts in three or four days. The causes whereof might be their too

much eating of Black Sugar, or the Milk of Coco-Nuts, which occasions Loos∣ness; but indeed the principal cause was those malignant Fogs, against which they had no shelter. This venomous Air caus'd a greater Destruction amongst the People of the Admiral Peter Verdoes, coming thither with his Fleet in the Year Sixteen hundred and ten, in November; when within fourteen days there died above a thousand, of which the Admiral himself, and the other Admiral Storm, together with seventeen Sea-Commanders, and all the Land-Officers except one. Nay, the Disease raged at length among them with so great fury, that the Bellies of some being open'd, their Cauls were turn'd to Water.

The Ground is tough, * 1.98 and of a yellowish Russet Colour; and by reason of the many Mists, which fall every Night, it grows soft, like Wax, and becomes fit to produce all sorts of Grain, Fruits, and Plants. The goodness and fertility thereof appears by this; That so soon as a plain Place is left untill'd, or laid waste, Trees grow upon it, and shoot up to a great height in few days, which the Blacks cut down and burn, to plant the Sugar-Canes in their Ashes, which grow every where in the Valleys, but yield less Juyce than those in Brasile.

The Canes Planted in the fore-mention'd Ashes, must have five Moneths time to ripen in: For that which is Planted in January, is Cut in June; and that of February, in July: And in this manner they Cut and Plant all the Year through. The full-grown Canes, when cut, are grownd small in Water-Mills, which the Portuguese call Ingenhas; or by the Labor of Slaves or Oxen, in places where there are no Rivers: Afterwards they put the Juyce into great Kettles, and boyl it over the Fire, to cleanse it; and with the Refuse they feed the Hogs, which eating nothing else, grow exceeding fat, and are esteem'd such wholesom and sweet Flesh, that they Diet therewith the Sick, to recover them to their Health.

Seven Ships Lading of Sugar this Island sends forth every Year; that is, Four for Portugal, two for the Canary and Madera Islands, and one for England: And there might be a great deal more made, and also whiter; but they want Pots and other Necessaries to cleanse it, and also Refiners to work it.

The Portuguese have sent for many Artists from the Maderas, to make their Sugar whiter and harder; but could never effect the same, the Air making their Labor fruitless, because it doth not suffer it to dry: And therefore the Sugar-makers are necessitated to set the Loaves upon low Planks inclos'd round, and to set them upon Boughs of thick dry Wood, which being set on Fire, make no Flame nor Smoak, but at length glimmer like glowing Coals, and so dry it, as in Stoves. Before the coming of the Portuguese, there grew no Sugar-canes, nor Ginger; but they brought them thither, and planted them.

In the Year Sixteen hundred forty five, there stood on this Island four and fifty Mills, which every one had their Moneths to grind, and could make every Year twelve or fourteen Tun of Sugar. In the Year Sixteen hundred and ten, there were sixty one Mills, which the Hollanders ruin'd; so that ever since they have for the most part been able to do nothing, for want of Coppers, and Slaves to work.

The Corn never attains to its full growth, because the over-fatness of the Soil, and the exceeding Moisture, hinders the due Ripeness. There are many Vineyards, which have all the Year Grapes, both white and red, ripe and un∣ripe; also sweet and soure Oranges, Lemmons, Citrons, Pomegranates, Coco-Nuts, Figs, Water-Melons, Peaches, Olives, Almonds, and such like; but the Fruits never grow to a full perfection, because these Plants have need of a

closing and drying Coolness, which here they want. The want of Corn, Nature hath supply'd to the Inhabitants by Roots, as Potatoes, or Ignames, their usual and chiefest Food, of which they have four sorts; one call'd Benyn; the second, Achorere; the third, Maniconge; and the fourth Saffranee, according to the Places from whence brought to this Island. The two first are the best; the one for its sweetness, and the other for its longest keeping good. The next is Mandihoka; but they eat little of it, rather sending it to Angola.

In Brasile they plant much of it; onely the Root grows nothing near so thick there, as in these places. And here you must observe, That the Juyce must be prest out of the Brasilian Mandihoka, being so hurtful and poysonous, that if any one should chance to eat of it unpress'd, he would run the hazard of his Life: But on this Island they immediately dry it as it is Grownd, with∣out pressing, of which none get any hurt or damage by eating.

Banano's also, Bakovens, Kussu-Apples, two or three sorts of Jojoos, or small Beews, and Turky-Wheat, or Maiz, may be had there; and Pesigos, a Fruit grow∣ing on a Tree of the same name, somewhat hairy on the out-side, which must be cut off; and then you have a little Meat, over a soft Stone, yet pleasant to the taste, and of a cooling quality.

Another Fruit call'd Kola, of the bigness of a Walnut, grows on very high Trees, in a light green Shell or Cod: It consists chiefly in four or five sharp red Kernels, lying close together; they taste like a raw Chessnut, but somewhat bitterish; yet a draught of Water after it, makes it seem sweet. They drive a good Trade herewith to Lovando St. Paulo, whither they carry it by Shipping.

Neither do they want Palmito-Trees, out of which the Inhabitants make Wine, and out of the Kernel of the Fruit extract by Decoction Palm-Oyl, which they send over to Angola.

Of the Cotton growing there, the Inhabitants make sad and light blue co∣lour'd Clothes, like those of Benyn, but nothing neer so good; however, transported to Lovando St. Paulo, they yield sufficient profit.

Lastly, Cabbith-Trees, call'd Musen, and by the Egyptians, Mauz; and by the Islanders, Abellance, which in a Years time grows very high: Besides Pot∣herbs, Cabbages, Turneps, Sallads, Lettuce, Parsley.

They cannot complain of want of Cattel, having Swine, Cows, Sheep, Goats, Rams, and some small Horses. Nor of Fowl; Turkeys, Geese, Tur∣tle-Doves, Hens, Moor-Hens, Sparrows, Linnets, Paraquetoes, and several other sorts of Birds, breeding there in abundance.

Neither are the Sea or Rivers less kind, yielding several sorts of Fish. In short, This Island might with reason enough be term'd a happy Habitation, if the Air was but of a good temper.

The offensive Vermin are of three sorts: Wasps, much bigger than ours in Europe, grievously tormenting all that go into the Woods upon any occasion: Pismires, which eat up all they find, even to the grown Sugar-Canes; but they die upon the change of Weather: And Rats, great Enemies also to the Su∣gar-Plants.

The Inhabitants are of two sorts: Portuguese, which first found this Island desolate, and inhabited the same; and Blacks, sent thither from Angola to work. Those which are born on this Island, of a Portuguese Father and Mo∣ther, though they have liv'd there a long time, are white, like the Portuguese; but the Children of a Portuguese-Man and a Black-Woman, are Brown, or Yel∣low, and therefore call'd Mulatos. There us'd every Year to be sent from

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

Lovando St. Paulo thither, about five thousand young Blacks for Slaves.

The Native Portuguese go clothed like their Countreymen, * 1.99 and the Negro-Merchants with their Families follow the same Mode; but the Slaves, as well Men as Women, go naked, onely with a Clout or Palmito-Leaf before their Privacies.

They make Bread of Potatoes, * 1.100 and drink Palm-Wine, or Water, or Goats Milk. In the time of great Heat, five or six Families come together, to eat their Meals in company, in Caves under Ground, where every one brings his own Food, and his own Houshold-stuff.

The Commodities carried from thence to other Places, consist chiefly in Muscovado-Sugar, yearly made to the quantity of a hundred thousand Arabe, every Arabe being thirty two Pounds, being pack'd in Leaves, and brought over to Europe; the afore-mention'd Cotton Clothes, the Fruit Kolas, and such like. The Merchandise transported thither by the Portuguese, and others, were Linnen of several kinds, all sorts of colour'd Yarn, Says, Silk Stockings, French Serges, mix'd Hair-Says, Axes, Chopping or Hewing-Knives, Iron, Salt, Lin∣seed Oyl, Red Copper in Plates, Copper Kettles, Rosin, Pitch, Tar, Ropes, Earthen Sugar-pots, of bigness to contain twenty or thirty Pound weight; Brandy, and all sorts of Strong-waters, Canary-Wine, Olives, Capers, fine Flow'r, Butter, Cheese, and such like.

The Revenues which the Portuguese have yearly from this Island, * 1.101 amount to a considerable Sum: For all Exported Goods must pay the Tenth of every thing for Custom to the King, either in Ready Money, Sugar, Palm-Oyl, or Clothes. Of Slaves brought from one place to another, they give one out of ten. Those which fish with a Net at the Shore, answer every fifth Fish: And for the Fishing with a Canoo in the Sea, for every eight days they must pay the Value of three Pence: Nay, every Plant which the Countrey produceth must pay somewhat to the King.

All the Inhabitants are Christians, * 1.102 except some Slaves, or Merchants, which have not constant Habitations there.

The Archbishop of Lisbon sends thither a Suffragan-Bishop, to supervise Church-Affairs, who holds his Episcopal See in the Principal City.

The Civil Government is manag'd by a Commander in Chief, sent thither by the Crown of Portugal. He keeps his Residence in the Chief City Pavoason, attended with a Judge, to administer Justice to the People.

The Inhabitants, * 1.103 as well in the City as the Countrey, bring all their Diffe∣rences before the Governor and Judge, to be decided; but may appeal from thence to Lovando St. Paulo. They are also bound to furnish the Governor, the Castle, and other Places of Guard, with Fire-wood; and to Build or Repair his House at their own Charges; and also all Bridges; and to keep all Roads and Ways clean and good.

During the War between the Crown of Portugal, and the States of the Uni∣ted Provinces, this Island was in the year Sixteen hundred forty one, on the se∣cond day of October, overcome in the following manner. Jol, whom we men∣tion'd before, landed with his People two Miles from Pavoason, by a Sugar-Mill at St. Anns, where he took his Repose that Night, and the next day the Ships came under the Castle, and the Soldiers march'd thither by Land; where arriving, they found all void either of People or Garrison; onely the place was Fortifi'd by six Pieces of Ordnance: From thence, having reduc'd it, they went to the great Fort, surrounded with a Wall of twenty eight Foot

high; where after a long Fight, for want of Ladders to scale the Walls, they were necessitated to Retreat, with the loss of many Men: But the City Pavaoson they easily gain'd, being void of Citizens, Soldiers, and all moveable Goods. Afterwards the foremention'd Fort was surrendred by the Governor, who with eighty Garrison-Soldiers, Blacks, Whites, and Mulatos, march'd out, and with five and twenty Soldiers of the Kings Band, were Shipp'd over to Lisbon. In the Fort came to the Victors hands six and thirty great Pieces of Ordnance, of which twenty were of Brass; abundance of Powder, Match, and Bullets; but Victuals scarce for one Moneth. The City and Fort thus taken, the Ad∣miral Jol caused the Portuguese to be call'd into the City again, to Treat with him upon Equitable Concerns; whereupon two of the chiefest came and bought off the Destruction of the Mills, and preservation of their Canes, for five thousand and five hundred Crusadoes, and ten thousand Arohas of Sugar: But the Kings Revenue and Treasure came to the Victors. Formerly, in the year Sixteen hundred and ten, this Island had been master'd by the Dutch, the City burnt, and the Plunder, consisting of a thousand Chests of Sugar, a great many Elephants Teeth, Silk, Woollen Cloth, and one and twenty Pieces of Ordnance, Shipp'd away. But the Admiral himself, and the Vice-Admiral, together with seventeen Seas, and all the Land-Officers except one, and the number of a thousand poor Soldiers, died there, as hath been already men∣tion'd.

Ilha Rolles.

ANother small Island, in Portuguese call'd Ilha Rolles, lieth to the South∣ward of St. Thomas, about three Musket-shot distant, with a conveni∣ent Passage between both, and good Anchorage for Ships: Onely there appear between this and Ilha del Cabres, seven Rocks above Water, which the Portuguese Sea-men call Los Sette Pedros.

The Island Ilha del Cabres.

IN the next place you come to Ilha del Cabres, or Goats-Isle, about two Mus∣ket-shot from St. Thomas, with a Channel for Ships between. The Coun∣trey rises Mountainous, and full of Wild Lemon-Trees.

The Island Caracombo

BElow the River Gaba, or Gabon, not far from the Aequinoctial-Line, * 1.104 lieth the Island Caracombo, whose Soil produceth many unknown Fruits, Beasts, and Fowl: There are oftentimes an hundred Birds-Nests upon one Branch of a Tree, made there by a wonderful Art, to keep the Serpents from them.

The Women are yellow, and impudently immodest, prostituting them∣selves before any Spectators. Some Ships riding at an Anchor at a certain time under this Island, there came off from it in a Barque eight and twenty Men to the Ship side, with a Drum, and a hollow Stick in stead of a Pipe. Four or five of them went aboard; whereof one, whose Countenance, Breast, and Arms were white, held a green Branch, with a Clock, and a Bird, whom the Master entertain'd with Victuals, wherewith they seem'd highly pleas'd. Af∣terwards a Pot of Palm-Wine was set before them, out of which they drank to one another. At length some of the Sea-men went with them ashore, to Barter, as they had desir'd, Iron against Ivory; and coming into the Village, they saw a Hut of about three Foot high, with a Roof, but somewhat open at one side, where stood a Crock cover'd with a Net, which they would suffer no body to touch, or to see what was within. On a Stick close by stood a Childs Scull, with a Bone in the one Eye; and by that lay several other Bones, both of Fishes and Beasts, on the Ground; whence they guess'd it to be a Burying-place. These People have neither Faith, nor Religion; yet Circumcise their Children.

The Island of St. Matthias.

MOre towards the West, in one Degree and fifty Minutes South-Lati∣tude, you arrive at St. Matthews Isle, so call'd by the Portuguese from the day of its Discovery: A small Spot, desolate, and not inhabi∣ted, though heretofore some Portuguese dwelt upon it. It hath one Brook of very good fresh Water.

Ilhas das Ascension, or Ascension-Island.

TOwards the South appeareth Ascension-Isle, in Portuguese, Ilhas das Ascen∣sion. It lieth eight Degrees and a half Southward of the Line, one hundred and ninety Spanish Miles North-West from St. Hellens; but larger, and full of Mountains. It hath no fresh Water at all, nor one green Branch or Leaf; but all wither'd, dry, and scorch'd: Onely infinite numbers of Fowl as big as Geese frequent it, because they find plenty of Fish to feed upon.

The Island of St. Hellen.

THe Island of St. Hellen, so call'd by the Portuguese, because first disco∣ver'd by them on St. Hellens day, being the one and twentieth of April, lieth in sixteen Degrees and fifteen Minutes South Latitude, in the Main Ocean, about five hundred and fifty Miles from the Cape of Good Hope, three hundred and fifty from Angola, and five hundred and ten from Brasile. The Circumference extends to about seven Miles, being high out of the Wa∣ter,

[illustration]

HELEN••

and surrounded on the Sea-coast with steep Rocks, shewing within many Cliffs, Mountains, and Valleys; of which, one nam'd Church-Valley, where, be∣hind a small Church, they climb up to the Mountains; and to the South; Apple-Dale, so call'd from the abundance of Oranges, Lemons, and Pomegra∣nates, enough to furnish five or six Ships. On the West side of the Church Ships have good Anchor-hold; but they must lie close under the Shore; for from the tops of the adjacent great Mountains, the Winds blow downwards with a very great force.

The Air seems very temperate and healthful; insomuch that sick Men, * 1.105 brought ashore there, in a short time recover: Yet the Heat in the Valleys is almost intollerable, whereas the Mountains have as great an excess of Cold. It rains there commonly every day in Showres five or six times; so that want of Water causes not the Barrenness of the Soil: For besides the Rain, it hath other good and wholesom Water; particularly, in the Church-Valley, whither Sea-men come for Fresh-Water, as also to two neighboring Places. And further, not∣withstanding the general accusation of Sterility, the Ground of its own accord brings forth Pease and Beans wild, that for want of Gatherers falling make a new Increase; also whole Woods of Orange, Lemon, and Pomegranate Trees, all the year through laden both with Blossoms and Fruits; very good Figs, abundance of Ebony and Rose-Trees: Besides in the Valleys, Parsley, Mustard-seed, Purslain, Sorrel, and wild Roman Cummin-seed.

The Woods and Mountains are full of Goats, very large Rams, and Wild Swine, but difficult to be catch'd. When the Portuguese did first discover this Place, they found neither four-footed Beasts, nor Fruit-Trees, but onely Fresh-Water: The Fruit-Trees they brought thither afterwards, which so increas'd since, that at present all the Valleys stand full of them, to the great wonder of the Beholders, seeing the Island is seldom frequented, and not at all Inhabited. Lastly, Partridges, Pidgeons, Moor-hens, and Peacocks, breed here numerous∣ly, whereof a good Marksman with his Gun (and not otherwise) may soon provide a Dinner for his Friends. On the Cliff-Islands, at the South side of this, are thousands of grey and black Meawes, or Sea-Pies, and also white and colour'd Birds, some with long, and some with short Necks, who lay their Egs on the Rocks; and so unaccustomed to fear, that they suffer themselves to be taken up with the Hand, and gaze at their Surprizers, till knock'd on the head with Sticks.

From the Salt-Water beating against the Cliffs, a Froth or Scum remains in some Places, which the heat of the Sun so purifies, that it becomes white and good Salt. Some of the Mountains yield Bole Armoniack, and a fat Earth like Terra Lemnia.

The Sea will answer the pains of a patient Fisherman, who must use an Angle, not a Net, because of the foul Ground, and beating of the Sea. The chief are Mackrels, Roaches, Carps, but differing in colour from those among us; Eels as big as a Mans Arm, and well-tasted; Crabs, Lobsters, Oysters, of as good a rellish as our English; and very good Mussles: Yet all these Conve∣niences have not brought thither any setled Colony; the King of Portugal, as they say, not permitting any of his Subjects to dwell there, lest they should appropriate it to themselves.

The Cape de Verd, or Salt-Islands.

THe Cape de Verd Islands, are so call'd for their nearness to Cape Verd, on the Main Coast of Africa; but the Portuguese name them Ilhas Verdes, Green Islands, because the Sea thereabouts is always cover'd with green Weeds, so thick, that one can scarce discern the Water, and the Ships can hard∣ly Sail through them: They are also commonly known by the name of the Salt-Islands, because of the many Salt-Pans, especially in Ilha del Sal, Boavista, Mayo, and St. Jago. Some take them for the Gorgons in the Atlantick Sea, spoken of by Mela; others for the Gorgades of Pliny, an ancient Dwelling-place, as the Poets feign of three Sisters, the Daughters of Forkus, viz. Medura, Sthenio, and Euryale; and some stick not to believe, that they were antiently call'd Hespe∣rides, from the neighboring Cape of Hespiere, mention'd by Ptolomy.

They lie over against the Main Coast of Africa, * 1.106 between Cabo Blank, and Ca∣bo Verd; from the nineteenth, to the fifteenth degree of North-Latitude, about two and forty Miles from the Shore.

Writers differ about their number very frequently; * 1.107 for some reckon them twelve, others eleven, some nine, but most agree upon ten, generally known by the corrupt Portuguese names; as follows, Ilha del Sal, Ilha Bovista, Ilha Mayo, Ilha del St. Jaga, Ilha del Fogo, Ilha del Brava, Ilha del St. Niklaos, Ilha del St. Lucie, Ilha del St. Vincent, and Ilha del St. Antonio; besides some other name∣less Islands.

The most Westerly, is St. Antonio, next those of St. Vincent, and St. Lucie; and the most Easterly Boavista.

All these, or at least some of them, are said to have been discover'd in the Year Fourteen hundred and forty, by a Genoes, call'd Anthonio Nolli; thou Jarrik affirms the Portuguese had that honor six years after; whereas Sanutus gives it to a Venetian call'd Lovis, Extracted out of the House of Cadamosto; sent abroad by the Infanta of Portugal, to discover new Countreys.

The Salt-Island, * 1.108 or Ilha del Sal, lies with its South end on the North-Latitude, of sixteen degrees and eight and thirty minutes; and with the South-East Point in sixteen degrees and forty minutes. It shews, coming out from the Canaries, or out of the North afar off, very high like a Hill, but nearer appears low. On the North side runs a River, and in the South-West a small Haven, and close by that another small Island: A Musket shot to the Southward of the West Point, where by a long Sandy Valley, fresh Water cometh out of the Mountains, is a good Road for Ships.

Buena, * 1.109 or Boavista, that is, a pleasant sight, perhaps for its pleasant appear∣ance afar off at Sea; they make its North Point eight Miles, and its South seven Miles from the Salt-Island. It may be distinguish'd at Sea from the Salt-Island, by the many white Banks on the North Coast, which the other hath not on that side; twenty Miles some have guess'd (but none know certainly) its circumference.

There is a long River which runs from the North end, North-East, and North-East and by East, a whole Mile; and some hold that it runs into the Sea with mighty Breaks, to the great hazard of adventuring Ships without a skilful Pilot.

[illustration]

IN SULE PROMONTORII VIRIDIS, Nispanis ISSAS DE CABO VERDE, Belgis DE SOUTE EYLANDEN.

There shoots also another Rieff from the South-Point, with some Rocks above, and some under Water, about a Mile and a half long, East, and East and by North from the Point. Under the South-West Point, where the Shore spreads West, South-West, and East North-East, is a good Haven, wherein Ships may Ride in fifteen or sixteen Fathom Water very good ground.

Mayo, lieth eight or nine Miles South South-Westward, from Boavista, being the least of all, and not above seven Miles in circuit. It hath within some sharp Mountains, and on the North side a Plain, a Mile broad, where a Rieff at the North-East Point shoots a good way from the Shore; and likewise another to the Westward, both which make a dangerous passage for Ships.

The common Harbor stands at the South-West side of the Shore, where Ships Ride in fifteen or sixteen Fathom Water, with a Sandy bottom; and have the West Point of the Island North and by West; and the South end of the Island St. Jago South-West.

On the North side lieth behind a black Point a convenient Harbor, neigh∣bour'd on the East side, by a Village of ten or twelve houses.

The Island of St. Jago, the famousest and biggest of all those of Cape de Verd, * 1.110 contains in length about twelve Miles, spreading North-West and South-East; at the South-East Point, you come into the Road of the Island Mayo, being five Miles broad.

From the South-East Point, the Shore spreads two Miles South-West, where the City Praya, signifying The Strand, hath its scituation on a convenient place between two Mountains, on a little rising Summit, surrounded with two Ri∣vers, which falling into the Sea, make two Harbors; one call'd Porto de Praya, a spacious Bay, where a hundred Ships may Ride at Anchor in fourteen Fa∣thom Water, within Musquet Shot of the Shore, with a defence from the Winds. Beyond Porto de Praya, towards the City lieth an Out-Point, in Por∣tuguese call'd Cabo de Tubarao; and North-Westward from this Cape, the other Haven, by the Portuguese call'd Porta Riebeirra Korea, very convenient, because lying between two Mountains, whose middle shoots thorow by a River, which takes original two Miles from thence, and falls into the Sea by a Mouth, a Bowe shot wide, not far off, which more Northward appears St. Maries Haven.

Jarrik places in this Island, a City call'd St. Thomas, seated conveniently; but that's uncertain, yet the Town of St. Jago may be seen, being the Metropolis of this and the other Islands, and the residence of the Portugal Bishop.

Somewhat more Westerly, on a Point, a Fort or Castle shews it self two Miles from Porto de Praya; and North-Westward from thence you come to Porto de Canisos.

Ilha del Fogo, or The Island of Fire, * 1.111 because of its Vomiting Smoke and Fire out of its highest Hills; lieth in fourteen degrees, and twenty minutes North-Latitude, twelve Miles North-Westerly from the South-West Point of St. Jago.

On the West side you discover another Road, with a Castle adjoyning, Built at the foot of a Mountain; but the Haven affords little conveniency, by reason of the strong Current before it. Those that Sail out of the East, and intend for this Harbor, must make to the Northward about the Countrey, or else they will scarce fetch it, for the Wind blows very hard, and the ground is deep, and runs down sloaping; so that indeed none can be had but under the Castle.

Four Miles South-Westward from del Fogo, * 1.112 lieth Ilha del Brava, or The Desolate Island; having on the West side a convenient Entrance for those that will take in fresh Water. But the Haven lies to the South-East, with fifteen Fathom Water, so that an East-India Man may Ride there with his Starne moved to∣wards the Shore. Above the Haven stands a Hermitage with people.

South-Westward from Ilha Brava, * 1.113 in the Altitude of twelve degrees and al∣most thirty minutes, appears a dry place two Ships length, and one broad.

St. Nicholas-Isle, seventeen Miles from the Salt-Island, sets its North-West end in sixteen degrees and twenty minutes, at the West end three Miles broad, and at the East a Mile and a half, and seven or eight long.

M. Figuredo places the Haven at the South side, giving it the name of Porto de Berguira, with an Islet at the entrance; and to the North-West lieth (beyond the Point) the Haven Fuoor Fole.

St. Lucie, * 1.114 a high and Hilly Island, eight or nine Miles long, with its South end in the Altitude of sixteen degrees and eighteen minutes. At the South-East end are two small Islands; as on the East South-East end the Haven, with a fine Sandy Shore: On the South-West towards St. Vincent, lies another Harbor of twenty Fathom Water.

Thirty Miles Westward from the Salt-Island, * 1.115 and two Miles West from St. Lucie, lieth St. Vincent, in the Altitude of seventeen degrees, five Miles long. It hath at the North-West side a half Oval-Bay, a Mile and a half wide, and surrounded with high Mountains. The high Mountains of St. Anthonys-Isle de∣fend this Bay from the West and North-West Winds; so that it seems the most convenient Haven among all the Islands; yet the coming to it is dangerous, by reason of the strong Winds, blowing impetuously from the high Moun∣tains. The South end of St. Vincent hath a little fresh Water, but elsewhere can∣not be had one drop.

St. Anthony, * 1.116 the most Northermost of all, in seventeen degrees North-Lati∣tude, two Miles and a half from St. Vincent, hath two high Mountains, the one almost as high as the Piek of Teneriff in the Canary-Islands, but both most commonly cover'd with Clouds. There live about five hundred Inhabitants on this Island. At the North-West end stands a Village of about twenty Huts, wherein dwell about fifty Families, as well Negro's as Whites; Govern'd by a Captain, Priest, and Schoolmaster, all which speak very good Portuguese, but they live very poorly. At the Northside is a Road in the Latitude of sixteen degrees and fifty minutes North-Latitude.

The unwholesomeness of the Air in all these Islands, * 1.117 breeds generally in the Inhabitants Burning-Feavers, Belly-Ach, and the Bloody-Flux.

Their Scituation being between the Equinoctial and Tropick of Cancer, af∣fords the Inhabitants two Summers. When the Sun enters into Cancer, which is in June, it Rains there continually with Storms of Thunder, Lightning, and Wind, which continues till the middle of October; which Jarrik seems to affirm, where he writes, That it doth Rain there in August, September, and October; and the Air about the middle of June gets a remarkable change, growing damp and foggy with Mists out of the Sea.

The Portuguese find these Islands wild and desolate; * 1.118 but most of them now are Till'd and bare Rice, Mayz, Tares, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, Bananoes, Ignames, Potatoes, Cucumbers, Cotton, Pomegranates, all sorts of Figs, Coco-Nuts, and Vines, which bear Fruit twice a year.

The principal Cattel breeding here, are Goats and Sheep, * 1.119 but they have a few Oxen and Cows.

Fowl, and Poultry increase even to admiration; such are Hens, Crains, Tur∣tle-Doves, Turkicocks, Morehens, Quails, and Birds which the Portuguese call Flamingo's, that is, Flemmings, with white Feathers, red Quills, and a Body like a Goose.

Their greatest Wealth consists in Goat-skins and Salt, * 1.120 which they send in great Parcels from the Islands Del Sall, Boavista, Mayo, and St. Lago, by Shipping into Europe. This as to the general, we will now descend to particulars.

The Inland of Del Sal, lies almost cover'd with Stones, but without either Plants or Trees, onely towards the South-East Point, hard by a white Sandy Bank, are seventy two Salt-Pans.

Many Turtels and Fish are taken between the Cliffs, out of which the Slaves decoct a Train-Oil, all out of the Salt-Water, for they have no fresh. In short, such is the sterility, as affords no other refreshment but poor Goats, yearly kill'd in great numbers for their Skins.

Two Miles from the Road on the South side of the Countrey, is a Pond of Salt-Water nine or ten foot deep, into which a Brook runs with very clear wa∣ter, but not held to be very wholsome, because brakish.

St. Jago yields all sorts of Fruits, having indeed a very fruitful Soyl; Trees of Cedar, Colcoes, Oranges, and the like, all along beautifie the Banks of the Ri∣ver Ribeira Korea. They have also Rice, Maiz, Mille, Cotton, and Sugar-Canes. The European Herbs and Plants sent thither grow very well there, but must be every year renew'd. All the Wine they drink, Lisbone furnishes them with; but other Provisions they can spare to their Neighbors. The Cattel there breeding, are Oxen, Horses, Asses, and Goats, besides Hens.

Ilha Brava, produces Figgs, Mulberries, and other Fruits; also Mille, Maiz, Water-Melons, and many others. Some Goats, but they may not be sold with∣out leave of the Governor of St. Jago.

On the Island St. Nicholas are but few Trees. It feeds many wild Cats and Goats; close by the Shore is fresh Water in a Pond, which in time of Rain flows over the Shore into the Sea.

St. Lucie appears Mountainous, with many Woods, and some fresh Water: At the West side, hath no other Inhabitants than Mice, and Tortoises.

At the Watering-place of the Island St. Vincent, fresh Water may be had out of Wells, but not very pleasant. Below on the highest Mountain, there flow∣eth a Brook, whose Waters are fresh and well tasted; all the rest sulphurous and brackish, and for that cause unfit to drink. The parch'd ground bears lit∣tle but stones, being every where so bare, that there is neither Leaves nor Grass to be found, but onely a few Shrubby Bushes, which Seamen pull up and fetch for Fuel; and Coloquintida, which grows in so great quantities, that it cannot be destroy'd. There are many Tortoises, very good in taste, and so big, that the Sea-men who touch at this Island for fresh Water, are compell'd to hale them Aboard with Ropes. They come every night in June and July, out of the Sea to the Land, when the Inhabitants casting them upon their backs, by reason of their weight they cannot turn themselves again. The Countrey hath many Rocks, but little Water. The Goats they kill for their Skins, which they send yearly to Portugal in great quantities. Their Inhabitants are Blacks, who live there very soberly without Recreation; fetching their Water in Leather Sacks made of Goats Skins; in the Year Sixteen hundred twenty three, they were

onely nineteen persons, eight Men, seven Women, and four young Girls.

Ilha de Mayo, a Rocky and dry Land, with little Grass; affords onely some few Figg-trees, which by the heat of the Climate, and dryness of the Ground, never bear any ripe Fruit; for though the Figgs have a promising colour, yet they are insipid or tastless. But Goats, or Cabriets, or Sheep breed so nume∣rously, that above five thousand Skins are carry'd thence yearly. They have al∣so some little Horses, Asses, Oxen and Cows, Turkeys, and Hens, of the big∣ness of a Pheasant, with white and black mix'd and speckled Feathers; but all wild, and in a manner untameable.

There are many Salt-Pans, which after they have let in the Salt-Water, being shut up, the heat of the Sun consolidates, and brings to a Gray-Salt; but 'tis a toilsome work to gather it, and yet more troublesome to get on Ship-board, because the Boats are not without great danger of being swallow'd up by the Whirlpits.

The Inhabitants are Whites and Blacks, usually sent thither from St. Jago; In the Year Fifteen hundred and five, they were two hundred and five and twen∣ty, Whites and Blacks, Old and Young, Exiles and Slaves; but in the Year Six∣teen hundred twenty and eight, there were onely fifty, besides Women.

The Inhabitants have neither Corn nor Clothing, unless brought them from St. Jago; but there are many Goats which the Portuguese and Blacks there resi∣dent catch up with Dogs, partly for the Skins, and partly for the Flesh.

St. Anthonio has many Woods, and therein several sorts of Fruits; as Oran∣ges, Lemons, Dates, Pomegranates, Sugar-Canes, Bakovens, and Melons: One Orchard lieth in this Island, of which nothing can be seen from Sea, but a high Palm-Tree, which the people of the Ships, in the Bay of St. Vincent discern plainly, and commonly send their Boats to barter Knives, and other such small Toys for Fruit, with the people who have a Portuguese Governor; their number generally about five hundred, most of them Blacks, who from another Orchard bring the Fruits upon Asses to the Shore side, to sell to the Sea-men. In the latter end of December, they have great ripe Citrons, Lemons and Oran∣ges, many Bananoes but unripe, Potatoes and Melons, very large, and singular good.

The Island Goree.

THe Island Goree lieth in fourteen degrees and fifteen minutes North-Latitude, about a Stones throw from the firm Land of Cape de Verd, in South South-East, about half a Canon shot in length, and a Musket shot in breadth.

This Island hath one little Bay, with a Road for Ships, from whence the Sea-men go Ashore, no other place affording that conveniency; neither hath it any Brooks or Rivers of fresh Water, but fetch all they use from Cape Verd.

In the Year sixteen hundred and seventeen, King Biram of Cape Verd gave it to the Netherlanders, who in a little time erected a Fort there.

At present there are two Forts or Batteries, one on the North-West end, up∣on a high Mountain, reasonable strong, and built of thick Stones; and the other upon the Shore, call'd The Fort Nassaw, where they can Land with no∣thing

[illustration]

The Fort SNASSAO & ORANGE upon y^e Island GOEREE.

[illustration]

Het FORT NASSOU van Binnen. met ORANJE. op •• EILANT GOEREE.

[illustration]

INSULAE CANARIAE alias FORTUNATAE dictae

but Boats and Lighters. The Fort on the Shore, is bigger than the up∣per, and contains a Store-house for Merchandize, and several Dwelling-places for the Souldiers and other people.

In the Year Sixteen hundred sixty three, both these Forts, together with the whole Island, were taken by Captain Holmes, so the Royal African English Com∣pany; but the year following, on the four and twentieth of October, by Admi∣ral de Ruyter regain'd: It was at that time possess'd with about sixty English Souldiers, under Sir George Abercromy, Chief Governor of the Island; all which, with convenient Boats for their hire, were carry'd to the River Gam∣boa: Then both the Forts, together with the whole Island, was left possessed with about an hundred and fifty Hollanders, Commanded by Johannes Cella∣rius, who presently caus'd the fall'n Batteries to be made up, raising the up∣per Fort, with a Breast-Work of three Foot higher, and fully repairing the lower.

The Canary Islands, or Islands of the Canaries.

THe Canary Islands, by the consent of most eminent Geographers, are held to be the Insulae fortunatae, or Fortunate Islands of Ptolomy and Pliny, though Ptolomy placeth them not far enough to the North, setting the most Northerly part of them but at sixteen degrees North-Latitude, whereas they extend to the thirtieth degree; and therefore we may suppose that they mistook them for the Islands of Cape Verd, last before mention'd.

Some will, that the Canaries receiv'd that name from the Spaniards, who at∣tributed to all the proper Denomination of the most Eminent, which they call'd Canary, from the many Dogs found at the first discovery thereof; Can signifying a Dog in Spanish; whereas the name of Canary was known a long time before by Pliny and Ptolomy: the Moors of Barbary call it Elbard, from the Pike-Mountain of Teneriff.

Ptolomy computes the number of these Islands to six, and names them, * 1.121 Apro∣pite, Here or Autolala, Pluitalia, Casperia, Canaria and Centuria; Pliny makes the same number, but differences their names thus; Ombrio, great and small Juno∣nie, Capraria, Niraria, and Canaria. There are that make Ombrio and Junonie, the same with Porto Santo, and Madera; Pluitalia for Lancerote; Casperia or Capraria, for Fuerte-ventura; Canaria for the Grand Canary, which still holds its name. At this day the Canary Islands, the Holy Haven, and Madera, being included, are seven, and known to all by the same names, viz. As the Island of Palma, Fierro, or Fer∣ro, Gomere, Teneriff, Grand Canary, Fuerta-Ventura, Lancerota, or Lanceroto: to which number Purchas adds, Lobos, Rocha, Gravosa, Santa Clara, Alegranca, and In∣ferno: by Sanutus reckon'd in this order, Vecchio Marino, Sante Clare, Rocho, Gra∣vosa, and Alegoranca: Ortelius brings among them one that he calleth Selvaia or Savage, the most Northerly of all, plac'd in the same rank with that of Ale∣granca; and besides Gravosa and Coro, which Thevet calleth the Heart Island. But these small Spots are of such little concern, that many do not so much as name them.

These Canary Islands, whereof Lasaretto, Fuerte-Ventura, Grand Canary, * 1.122 and Tene∣riff are the chiefest; they have their scituation between six and twenty degrees and thirty minutes, and twenty degrees and thirty minutes North-Latitude,

opposite to Cape Nun in Morocco, seventy or eighty Miles from the Main-Land of Barbary, and nine or ten distant from each other.

They were for many Ages known to the Antients, * 1.123 in the time of Pliny, Me∣la, and Strabo; but by negligence of Posterity, the places lost as to knowledge, though Geographers had preserv'd their memory by Recording their Names, which gave the curious cause of enquiry: Some Centuries they continu'd for∣gotten, till in the Year Four hundred and five, John King of Castile transferr'd all his Right therein, to a French Nobleman of Chaux in Normandy, by name, John of Betancourt; who provided with Ammunition and Victuals, Sailing thither, at their first coming took in the Haven of Lancerota, and the Castle; and having built the Cloyster of St. Francis, together with a Church, return'd victorious to Spain; where, according to Grammay, for a Sum of Money he tranferr'd his Right to Diego de Herrera, who subdu'd the Island of Fort-aventure, to which he first gave the name of St. Bonaventure. But Sanutus writes, that Betancourt took in the Island of Lancerota and Fort-aventura, by the Consent, and at the Charge of the King of Castile, to whom he sold the Inheritance thereof after his death. Grammay affirms, That Diego de Herrera made himself Master of Ferro and Go∣mere; but not able to defend his Conquest, he sold his Interest in the whole to King Ferdinand; who after a doubtful and hot dispute with the Inhabitants, overcame the Grand Canary. Afterwards Alphonses and Bartelt de Lugo, sent thi∣ther in the Year Fifteen hundred and twelve, subjected Ferro and de Palma. Sa∣nutus on the other side mentions, That Gomere and Ferro, with the three other, Grand Canary, Palma and Teneriff, were found first by Alphonses de Lugo, and Peter de Vera, Noblemen of Xeres, and by order of King Ferdinand, and Queen Isabella; and that Palma and Teneriff were subdu'd by Alphonses de Lugo, and the three other by Peter de Vera, and Michael de Maxica.

If we enter into a serious scrutiny of the quantity of those Islands in general, * 1.124 we shall find, that in respect of their Scituation, being near the Tropick of Cancer, they are subject to great heat, sufficiently testifi'd by the early Harvest in March and April. The Grounds boast a more than ordinary fertility, but especially they carry Repute and Glory for the Delicious Canary-Wine, where∣with they furnish the whole world. Sanutus avers, That formerly but one of them brought forth this Wine and Corn, but now all are equally productive of both. There are also Figgs, Oranges, Pomegranates, Citrons, Peaches, and other Fruits; besides many Sugar-Canes, Palm-Trees, and Pepper-Trees, which grow on the Banks of the Rivers.

There grows also a Plant, commonly call'd Oriselle, held by most Herbalists to be the Phalaris of Dioscorides, and by De la Champ upon Pliny, for the Gierst of Theophrastus; from whence grows the Canary Seed, which the Inhabitants pro∣pagate diligently to feed Canary Birds.

They have also a black Gum or Pitch, stiled Bre, but principally in Teneriff, burn'd out of Pine in the following manner; They cut the Trees in pie∣ces, which they lay cross one upon another over a Trench, whereinto the Pitch (dissolving by the heat of the fire) falls.

They are competently rich in Cattel, * 1.125 as Oxen, Goats, Wild-Asses, Roe-Bucks, with many sorts of Fowl, amongst which, Canary-Birds, which sing very clear and pleasantly.

The Inhabitants are a sturdy and strong people, * 1.126 neither White nor Black, but Tauny, with flat and broad Noses, lively and nimble Spirited, stout-hearted, and inclin'd to Wars. There remain yet some few of the antient Barbarous Peo∣ple,

call'd by the Spaniards, Guanchas; but they have in some measure laid aside their Native rudeness: Some of them seem to have a Caninus Appetitus, an unsa∣tisfi'd Voracity, so that one of them will sometimes eat up twenty Rabbets, and a whole Goat at a Meal. By continual converse, most of them, besides their Lingua Vernacula, or Mother-Tongue, speak good Spanish.

In Grand Canary, the chiefest of the whole knot, * 1.127 the Bishop and Inquisitors have their Seat, and the Chief Governor a Spaniard, his Residence, attended by all inferior Ministers of Justice, for the deciding of differences, arising between the Inhabitants: And by the equal care, both of the Ecclesiastical and Civil Power, Christianity hath gain'd so firm a footing, * 1.128 that admits of no Oppo∣nent or Rival; those obstinate persons that fled into the Mountains, being ut∣terly extirpated.

The Merchandize brought from thence, are Canary-Wines, Goat-Skins, Su∣gar, and such like.

The Grand-Canaries.

THe Grand-Canaries, according to the common opinion, is the same with the Ancients, so lying Westward of Lancerote, near the Cape of Bajader, but more Northerly, seven and twenty degrees, and thirty minutes from the Equator; the length accounted thirty French, or eighteen Dutch Miles; though Thevet shortens the length, and in breadth gives it no more than twelve French.

Here stands the Metropolis of the whole, being the Bishops See, contain∣ing the Cathedral, and some Cloysters of St. Francis and others. They have be∣sides the Cities of Galdar and Guia, with divers dispers'd Cloysters, built by the Munificence and Generosity of the Genoese Merchants.

It excells in grandeur and fertility all the rest, being inhabited by nine or ten thousand Souls, holding a Jurisdiction over them, as well in Spiritual as Temporal Affairs.

Fortaventure, or Fuerteventura.

FOrtaventure, or Fuerteventura, by some taken for the Casperia of Ptolomy, * 1.129 and Capraria of Pliny, lieth close to the Main Land of Barbary, in eight and twenty degrees North-Latitude, Northward of Lancerote; and West∣ward of the Grand-Canaries, fifteen Miles in length, and three in breadth, strengthen'd with three Cities on the Sea-Coast, namely, Lanagla, Tarafalo, and Pozo Negro.

On the North side opens a Haven call'd Chabras, and another on the West side very convenient.

Lancerote.

LAncerote, * 1.130 or Lancerota, as some imagine, the Pluitalia of Ptolomy, and Pluva∣lia of Pliny, though more probably it might be Ferro, which lieth Nor∣therly of Fuerteventura, and Westerly of the Grand Canaries, in nine and twenty Degrees and thirty Minutes of North-Latitude, twelve Miles in length, and seven Miles in breadth. Gramay placeth in it the City Cayas, which in the Year Sixteen hundred and eighteen, together with the Island, was Plunder'd by the Tukish Pyrates of Algier, who carry'd away Captive fourteen hundred and sixty eight Men.

Teneriff.

Teneriff, or Tenarife, supposed to be the Nivaria of Pliny, lieth to the West, six Miles from the Grand Canaries, in seven and twenty Degrees, and thirty Minutes North-Latitude. Thevet and Sanutus make it the big∣gest of all the Canary Isles, extending the length of it to fourteen Legaues; but Gramay will not allow so much. It hath on the North-side the Haven of Santa Cruize, and three fine Cities, Lagana, Ortone, and Garrico, together with St. Christo∣phers.

Here stands the so fam'd Mountain, by the Moors call'd Elbard; by the Spa∣niards, El Pico de Terrairo; and by us, The Pike of Teneriff, thought not to have its equal in the World for heighth, because it spires with its top so high into the Clouds, that in clear Weather it may be seen sixty Dutch Miles off at Sea; nor can it be ascended but in July and August, lying in all the other Moneths cover'd with Snow; though upon this and the near adjacent Islands none is to be seen. To come to the top requires three days Journey: from whence may be seen all the Islands lying about thirty Dutch Miles off in the Sea.

Here they find great quantities of Sulphur, with abundance of Fruits, Wine, and Sugar. The Inhabitants are reckon'd to be about the number of five thousand.

In the History of the Royal Society of London, lately set forth by Dr. Thomas Sprat, we have a Relation from some considerable Merchants, and Persons worthy of Credit, who went to the top of this Pico Teneriff, set down in these following words:

HAving furnisht our selves with a Guide, * 1.131 Servants, and Horses to carry our Wine and Provision, we set forth from Oratava, a Port-Town in the Island of Teneriff, situated on the North-side, two Miles distant from the Main Sea, and travell'd from twelve at night till eight in the morning, by which time we got to the top of the first Mountain towards the Pico de Terraira: there under a very large and conspicuous Pine-Tree we took our Breakfast, Din'd, and refresh'd our selves till two in the afternoon: Then we passed through many sandy Ways, over many lofty Mountains, but naked and bare, and not cover'd with any Pine-Trees, as our first nights passage was: this ex∣pos'd

[illustration]

The pike Mountaine upon The Island Tenerieto. De PIEK-BERGH op het EILANT TENERIETO

us to excessive heat, till we arrived at the Foot of the Pico, where we found many huge Stones; which seem'd to have falln from some upper part: about six in the Evening we began to ascend up the Pico; but we were scarce advanced a Mile, and the Way being no more passable for Horses, we left them with our Servants. In the ascent of one Mile some of our Company grew very faint and sick, disorder'd by Fluxes, Vomitings, and Aguish Distempers, our Horses Hair standing upright like Bristles; and calling for some of our Wine, carried in small Barrels on a Horse, we found it so wonderfully cold, that we could not drink it till we had made a Fire to warm it, notwithstand∣ing the Air was very calm and moderate: but when the Sun was set, it began to blow with such violence, and grow so cold, that taking up our Lodging among the hollow Rocks, we were necessitated to keep great Fires in the Mouthes of them all night. About four in the morning we began to Mount again, and being come another Mile up, one of our Company fail'd, and was able to proceed no farther: Here began the Black Rocks. The rest of us pursu'd our Journey till we came to the Sugar-Loaf, where we began to travel again in a white Sand, being fitted with Shooes, whose single Soles are made a Finger broader than the upper Leather, to encounter this difficult Passage; having ascended as far as the Black Rocks, which lay all flat like a plain Floor, we climb'd within a Mile of the very top of the Pico, and at last we gain'd the Summit; where we found no such Smoak as appear'd a little below, but a continuall perspiration of a hot and sulphurous Vapor, that made our Faces extreamly sore. All this way we found no considerable alteration of the Air, and very little Wind; but on the top it was so impetuous, that we had much ado to stand against it whilst we drank the Kings Health, and fir'd each of us a Piece. Here also we took our Dinner, but found that our Strong-waters had lost their Vertue, and were almost insipid, while our Wine was more spiritous and brisk than before. The top, on which we stood, being not above a Yard broad, is the brink of a Pit, call'd The Caldera, which we judg'd to be a Mus∣quet-shot over, and near fourscore Yards deep, in form of a Cone, hollow with∣in like a Kettle, and cover'd over with small loose Stones, mixed with Sulphure and Sand, from among which issu'd divers Spiracles of Smoak and Heat, which being stirr'd with any thing, puffs and makes a noise, and so offensive, that we were almost suffocated with the sudden emanation of Vapors upon the remo∣ving one of these Stones, which were so hot, as not easily to be handled. We de∣scended not above four or five Yards into the Caldera, because of the slipperiness under foot, and the difficulty; but some have adventur'd to the bottom. Other matters observable we discover'd none, besides a clear sort of Sulphure, which lay like Salt upon the Stones. From this renown'd Pico we could see the Grand Canaries, fourteen Leagues distant; Palma, eighteen; and Gomera, seven; which interval of Sea seem'd not much wider than the Thames about London. We discerned also the Herro, being distant about twenty Leagues, and so to the outmost Limits of the Sea much farther. As soon as the Sun appeared, the Shadow of the Pico seem'd to cover, not onely the whole Island, and the Grand Canaries, but the Sea to the very Horizon, where the top of the Sugar-Loaf, or Pico, visibly appear'd to turn up, and cast its Shade into the Air it self, at which we were much surpriz'd: But the Sun was not far ascended, when the Clouds began to rise so fast, as that they intercepted our Prospect both of the Sea and the whole Island, except the tops onely of the subjacent Mountains, which seem'd to pierce them through. Whether these Clouds do very sur∣mount

the Pico, we cannot say, but to such as are far below, they seem sometimes to hang above it, or rather wrap themselves about it, as constantly when the West-winds blow; this they call The Cap, and is an infallible Prognostick of en∣suing Storms. One of our Company who made this Journey again two years after, arriving at the top of the Pico before day, and creeping under a great Stone to shroud himself from the cold Air, after a little space found himself all wet, and perceiv'd it to come from a perpetual trickling of Water from the Rocks above him. Many excellent and exuberant Springs we found issuing from the tops of most of the other Mountains, gushing out in great spouts, al∣most as far as the huge Pine-Tree, which we mention'd before. Having staid a while at the top, we all descended the sandy Way, till we came to the Foot of the Sugar-Loaf, which being steep, even almost to a perpendicular, we soon passed: And here we met with a Cave, about ten yards deep, and fifteen broad, being in shape like an Oven, or Cupola, having a hole at the top near eight Yards over: This we descended by a Rope that our Servants held fast at the top, while with the other end, being fastned about our middles, we swung our selves, till being over a Bank of Snow, we slid down, lighting upon it: we were forced to swing thus in the descent, because in the midst of the bot∣tom of this Cave, opposite to the overture at the top, is a round Pit of Water, like a Well; the surface whereof is about a Yard lower, but as wide as the Mouth at top, and about six Fathom deep: We supposed this Water not a Spring, but dissoved Snow blown in, or Water trickling through the Rocks. About the sides of the Grot, for some heighth there is Ice and Isicles hanging down to the Snow: But being quickly weary of this excessive cold place, and drawn up again, we continu'd our descent from the Mountains by the same Passage we went up the day before, and so about five in the Evening arrived at Oratava, from whence we set forth; our Faces so red and sore, that to cool them we were forced to wash and bathe them in Whites of Eggs. The whole heighth of the Pico in perpendicular, is vulgarly esteem'd to be two Miles and a half. No Trees, Herbs, nor Shrubs, did we find in all the Passage, but Pines; and among the whiter Sands a kind of Broom, being a bushy Plant; and on that side where we lay all night, a kind of Coalon, which had Stems of eight Foot high, and the Trunk near a Foot thick, every Stem growing in four squares, and emerging from the Ground like Tufts of Rushes: Upon the edges of these Stems grow very small red Buttons, or Berries, which being squeezed, produce a poysonous Milk; which falling upon any part of a Horse, or other Beast, fetches off all the Hair from the Skin immediately. Of the wi∣ther'd Sticks of this Vegetable we made our Fire all night. This Plant is also universally spread over the Island, and is perhaps a kind of Euphorbium.

Of the Island Teneriff it self, this account was given by a judicious and inge∣nious Man, who lived twenty years in it, as a Physitian and Merchant; his opinion is, That the whole Island being a Soil mightily impregnated with Brimstone, did in former times take Fire, and blow up all, or near all at the same time; and that many Mountains of huge Stones calcin'd and burnt, which appears all over this Island, especially in the South-west part of it, were cast up, and raised out of the bowels of the Earth at the time of that general Conflagration; and that the greatest quantity of this Sulphur lying about the Center of the Island, raised up the Pico to that heighth at which it is now seen. And he saith, That any one upon the Place, that shall carefully note the situa∣tion and manner of those calcined Rocks, how they lie, will easily be of that

mind; for they lie (says he) three or four Miles almost round the bottom of the Pico, and in such order one above another almost to the Sugar-Loaf, as 'tis call'd, as if the whole Ground swelling and rising up together by the ascension of the Brimstone, the Torrents and Rivers of it, did with a sudden eruption rowl and rumble them down from the rest of the Rocks, especially (as is said before) to the South-west; for on that side from the very top of the Pico almost to the Sea-coast, lie huge heaps of these burnt Rocks one under another: and there still remain the very tracks of the Brimstone-Rivers, as they ran over this quarter of the Island, which hath so wasted the Ground beyond recovery, that nothing can be made to grow there but Broom: But on the North-side of the Pico, few or none of these Stones appear; and hence he concludes, That the Vulcanio discharged it self chiefly on the South-west-side. He adds farther, That at the same time, Mynes of several Metals were blown up, some of those cal∣cined Rocks resembling Iron, Oar, some Silver, and others Copper; particu∣larly on the South-west part, call'd Azuleios, being very high Mountains, where never any English-man but himself (that ever he heard of) was. There are vast quantities of a loose blewish Earth, mixed with blew Stones, which have a yellow rust upon them, like that of Copper or Vitriol; as also many small Springs of Vitriol-water, where he supposes a Copper Myne. And he was told by a Bell-Founder of Oratava, That he got out of two Horse-loads of this Earth, as much Gold as made two large Rings. And a Portuguese who had been in the West-Indies, told him, That his opinion was, there were as good Mynes of Gold and Silver there, as the best in the West-Indies. Thereabouts also are Nitrous-waters and Stones, cover'd over with a deep Saffron-colour'd rust, tasting of Iron. And farther, he mentions one of his Friends, which of two Lumps of Earth, or Oar, brought from the top of this side of the Mountain, made two Silver Spoons. All this he confirmed by the last Instance of the Palm-Island, eighteen Leagues from Teneriff, where, about twelve years since, so Vulcanio was fixed, the violence whereof made an Earthquake in this Island, so great, that he and others ran out of their Houses, fearing they would have fall'n upon their Heads. They heard the noise of the Torrent of flaming Brimstone like Thunder, and saw the Fire as plain by night for six weeks toge∣ther, as a burning Torch, and so much Sand and Ashes, brought from thence by the Wind and Clouds, fell upon his Hat, as would fill the Sand-box of his Ink∣horn.

In some places of this Island groweth a crooked Shrub call'd Legnan, which they bring for England as a sweet Wood. There are likewise Apricock, Peach-Trees, and others, which bear twice a year; also Pear-Trees as preg∣nant; Almonds, with a tender Shell; Palms, Plantains, Oranges and Lemons, especially the Paeguada's, which have small ones within them, from whence they are so denominated. Also they have Sugar-Canes, and a little Cotton, Coloquintida, &c. The Roses blow at Christmas. There are good Carnations, and very large; but no Tulips will grow or thrive there. Samphire clothes the Rocks in abundance, and a kind of Clover, the Ground. Another Grass grows near the Sea, which is of a broader Leaf, so luscious and rank, that it will kill a Horse that eats of it, but no other Beast. Eighty Ears of Wheat have been found to spring from one Root, but grows not very high. The Corn of this is transparent like the purest yellow Amber, and one Bushel hath brought forth a hundred in a seasonable Year.

The Canary-Birds which they bring to us in England, breed in the Baranco's,

or Gills, which the Water hath fretted away in the Mountains, being places very cold. There are also Quails, Partridges, larger than ours, and exceed∣ing beautiful, great Wood-Pigeons; Turtles at Spring, Crows, and sometimes the Falcons come flying over from the Coast of Barbary.

Bees are carry'd into the Mountains, where they prosper exceedingly. And there they have wild Goats, which climb to the very top of the Pico sometimes; also Hogs, and multitudes of Coneys.

Of Fish they have the Cherna, a very large and excellent Fish, better ta∣sted than any we have in England; the Mero, Dolphins, Lobsters, without great Claws, Mussles, Periwincles, and the Clacas, which is absolutely the very best Shell-fish in the world; they grow in the Rocks, five or six under one great Shell, through the top-holes whereof they peep out with their Nebs; from whence (the Shells being broken open a little more with a Stone) they draw them. There is also another sort of Fish like an Eel, which hath six or seven Tails of a Span long, united to one Head and Body, which is also as short. Besides, there they have Turtles and Cabrido's, which are better than our Trouts.

The Island is full of Springs of fresh Water, tasting like Milk; which in Lalagima, where the Water is not so clear and lympid, they cleanse by percola∣ting it through a kind of spungy Stone, cut in form of a Bason.

The Vines which afford those excellent Wines, grow all about the Island within a Mile of the Sea; such as are planted farther up are not esteem'd, nor will they thrive in any of the other Islands. Concerning the Guanchio's, or an∣tient Inhabitants, he gave this full account:

The third of September, about twelve years since, he took his Journey from Guimar, a Town for the most part inhabited by such as derive themselves from the antient Guanchio's, in the Company of some of them, to view their Caves, and the Corps buried in them, (a favour they seldom or never permit to any, having the Corps of their Ancestors in great veneration, and likewise being extremely against any molestation of the Dead) but he had done several Elee∣mosinary Cures among them, for they are very poor (yet the poorest think themselves too good to Marry with the best Spaniard) which endeared him to them exceedingly, otherwise it is death for any Stranger to visit these Caves and Bodies. The Corps are sew'd up in Goat-skins with Thongs of the same, with very great curiosity, particularly in the incomparable exactness and even∣ness of the Seams; and the Skins are made very close and fit to the Corps; which for the most part are entire, the Eyes clos'd, Hair on their Heads, Ears, Nose, Teeth, Lips and Beard, all perfect, onely discolour'd, and a little shri∣vell'd; likewise the Pudenda of both Sexes. He saw about three or four hundred in several Caves, some of them standing, others lying upon Beds of Wood, so hardned by an Art they had (which the Spaniards call Curay, to cure a piece of Wood,) that no Iron can pierce or hurt it. These Bodies are very light, as if made of Straw; and in some broken Bodies be observ'd the Nerves and Ten∣dons, and also the String of the Veins and Arteries very distinctly. By the relation of the most antient of this Island, they had a particular Tribe that had this Art onely among themselves, and kept it as a thing sacred, and not to be communicated to the Vulgar. These mixt not themselves with the rest of the Inhabitants, nor Marry'd out of their own Tribe, and were also their Priests and Ministers of Religion. But when the Spaniards conquer'd the Place, most of them were destroy'd, and the Art perisht with them; onely they held some Tra∣ditions,

yet of a few Ingredients that were us'd in this business; they took But∣ter (some say they mixed Bears-grease with it) which they kept for that pur∣pose in the Skins; wherein they boyl'd certain Herbs, first a kind of wild La∣vender, which grows there in great quantities upon the Rocks; secondly, an Herb call'd Lara, of a very gummy and glutinous consistence, which now grows there under the tops of the Mountains; thirdly, a kind of Cyclamen, or Sow-bread; fourthly, wild Sage, which grows plentifully upon this Island. These with others, bruised, and boyl'd up with Butter, rendred it a perfect Bal∣som. This prepar'd, they first unbowel the Corps (and in the poorer sort, to save Charges, took out the Brain behind:) after the Body was thus order'd, they had in readiness a Lixivium made of the Bark of Pine-Trees, wherewith they washt the Body, drying it in the Sun in Summer, and in the Winter in a Stove, this repeating very often: Afterward they began their Unction both without and within, drying it as before; this they continu'd till the Balsom had penetrated into the whole Habit, and the Muscle, in all parts appear'd through the contracted Skin, and the Body became exceeding light: then they sew'd them up in the Goat-skins, as was mention'd before.

The Antients say, that they have above twenty Caves of their Kings and great Personages, with their whole Families, yet unknown to any but themselves, and which they will never discover.

Lastly he says, That Bodies are found in the Caves of the Grand Canaries, in Sacks, quite consumed, and not as these in Teneriff.

Antiently, when they had no knowledge of Iron, they made their Lances of Wood, hardned as before mention'd.

They have Earthen Pots, so hard that they cannot be broken: Of these some are found in the Caves, and old Bavances, and us'd by the poorer People that find them, to boyl Meat in.

Their Food is Barley Parched, and then Ground with little Stone-Mills, and mingled with Milk and Honey, which they always carry with them in Goat-skins at their Backs.

To this day they drink no Wine, nor care for Flesh: they are very ingeni∣ous, lean, tall, active, and full of courage; for they will leap from Rock to Rock, from a very prodigious heighth till they come to the bottom, sometimes making ten Fathom deep at one Leap, in this manner: First they Tertiate their Lances, which are about the bigness of a Half-Pike, and aim with the Point at any piece of a Rock upon which they intend to light, sometimes not half a Foot broad; in leaping off they clap their Feet close to the Lance, and so carry their Bodies in the Air: the Point of the Lance comes first to the place, which breaks the force of their fall; then they slide gently down by the Staff, and pitch with their Feet on the very place they first design'd, and so from Rock to Rock, till they come to the bottom: But their Novices sometimes break their Necks in the learning.

He told also (and the same was seriously confirm'd by a Spaniard, and ano∣ther Canary Merchant there in the Company,) That they Whistle so loud, as to be heard five Miles off, and that to be in the same Room with them when they Whistle, were enough to endanger the breaking of the Tympanum of the Ear; and added, That he (being in Company of one that Whistled his loudest) could not hear perfectly in fifteen days after. He affirms also, that they throw Stones with a force almost as great as that of a Bullet; and now use Stones in all their Fights, as they did antiently. Thus far Mr. Sprat.

Gomere.

IN the West of Teneriff lieth Gomere, in six and twenty Degrees and a half North-Latitude, a barren Island, yet producing Wine and Sugar.

Palma.

THe Island of Palma, the most Westerly of all the Canaries, lieth twelve Miles Northward of Ferro, and four from Gomere, in eight and twen∣ty Degrees North-Latitude. It is small, but exceeding fruitful, hath plenty of Pasture, affords many Grapes and Coleworts, Sugar, and other Fruits, and abounds with Cheese and Milk; but the chiefest Trade consists in Wine.

Ferro, or Iron-Isle.

THe Island call'd by the Spani••rds, Hierro; by the Portuguese, Fierro, and by the Italians, Ferro (which all signifie Iron, lieth four Miles from Go∣mere, in six and twenty Degrees and forty Minutes North-Latitude, and held by some undoubtedly to be the Pluitalia of Ptolomy, or Ombron, or Pluvialia of Pliny and Solinus. It comprehends some Towns, of which the chief posses∣seth a Cloyster and a Church of St. Francis; it hath little Water, and that which they have is brackish and unsavory: but this inconvenience and want receives a strong supply from a Tree, always cover'd with thick Mists or Clouds, except in the hottest time of the day: this Mist casts so great a dew upon the Tree, that from the Leaves drop constantly pure clear Water, twenty Tuns in a day, falling into two Stone Cisterns, each of twenty Foot square, and sixteen Hands deep, made for that purpose on the North-side of the Tree.

When the Spaniards at the Conquest hereof found no Springs, Wells, nor Rivers of fresh Water, they stood amazed, and asked the Inhabitants whence they gat their Water? they answer'd, That they preserv'd the Rain-water in Vessels; for the Tree they had cover'd with Canes, Earth, and other things, in hope by this means to cause the Spaniards to leave the Island: But this sub∣tilty did them little good; for a Woman had discover'd the Secret to a Spaniard that was her Gallant, who disclos'd it again to the Spanish Commanders. In brief, this Tree affords so much Water, that it not onely furnisheth the Inha∣bitants and their Cattel, but also Ships which by accident come thither.

This Tree, which the Inhabitants call Garoe, and the Spaniards, Santo, that is, Holy, attains a competent bigness, having always green Leaves like the Lawrel, but not much bigger than those of a Nut-Tree, and a Fruit like an Acorn in the Shell, with a very sweet and Spicy Kernel; and for defence and presenva∣tion they have enclos'd it with a Stone-Wall.

Here grows some Corn, Sugar-Canes, much Fruit, and Plan•••• in great

abundance; besides many Cattel, affording the Inhabitants much Milk and Cheese.

The small Islands, lying near, and about the Canaries, as Vecchio Marino, Ro∣cha, Graciosa, Santa Clare, Alegranca, Inferno, and Salvaies; little can be said of them, but onely that Salvaies, is the most Northerly; Vecchio Marino, or Vecchi Marini, lying between Lancerote and Forteventure; Santa Clare, a little Northward of Lancerote, and smaller than Graciosa; Alegranca more Northward than the three former: But all these deserve rather the name of Rocks or Cliffs than Islands.

The Description of these Islands, Linschot and others, add as a Wonder, a certain Island call'd St. Borondon, or Porondon, a hundred Leagues, or therea∣bouts, from Ferro; which such as have by accident seen, greatly praise, as being full of Trees, very delectable, fruitful, and inhabited by Christians, whose Lan∣guage and Descent is not known; but never any have been able to find upon Design. Many Spaniards have attempted to discover it, but in vain; whereup∣on some have believ'd, that it never appears to those that seek after it: Others are confident, that it appears onely upon some certain Days, or is constantly cover'd with Clouds, or that by a special power of the Sea, Ships are driven from it.

Santo Port, or Holy-Haven.

THe Island of Santo Port, or Holy-Haven, being situate in the Atlantick Ocean, opposite to the Cape of Cantyn, in the Kingdom of Morocco, in two or three and thirty Degrees and thirty Minutes North-Latitude, Ortelius held to be the Cerne of Ptolomy; others, the Ombrio, or Pluvialia of Pliny; but more probably it seems to be the Pena of Ptolomy, from the Latitude. It containeth five Miles in compass, and was first discover'd in the Year Four∣teen hundred twenty eight, by two Portuguese Noble-men, Jan Zarco, and Tristan Vaz, being then uninhabited and desolate, but soon after Peopled, and provided of all Necessaries. They have no Haven there, but one very conve∣nient Bay.

This Island bears Corn and other Grain; and breeds also Oxen, wild Hogs, and an infinite number of Coneys; besides, as good Honey and Wax as can be had in the most fam'd Places.

There grows also a Tree, from which issues a Gum by the Apothecaries and Druggists, call'd Dragons-Blood.

The Island of Madera.

LOwer to the South appears an Island, by the Spaniards call'd Madera, * 1.132 and by the Portuguese, Madeira, * 1.133 because at the first Discovery they found it overgrown with Wood, distant about thirty Miles from Santo Port, and sixty from the Canaries, in thirty Degrees and one and thirty Minutes North-Latitude, between the Straights of Gibraltar and the Canaries.

The Form resembles a Triangle, * 1.134 holding in compass (according to Sanutus)

an hundred and forty Italian Miles, and five and thirty Dutch Miles long, from East to West, and six broad.

In the Year Fourteen hundred and twenty, John Gonzalves, and Tristan Vaz, both Portuguese, sent forth by Henry the young King of Portugal, to discover new Countreys, first took notice of it; whither being come, and seeing it (as we said) overgrown with Wood, thought it little worth: but an accident happening amongst the Wood, uncover'd this fruitful piece of Ground, that Nature had so long kept hidden, and by burning clear'd it of that which had hinder'd the inhabiting it. By this means the Portuguese gain'd it, but under∣went many hazards therein before they could make any advantage from it, in regard the Fire raged so furiously, as that it forced them for a time to forsake the Place. The burning continu'd seven years among the thick Trees; but at length the Fuel failing, the Fire extinguish'd of it self; whereon immediately planting and manuring it, 'tis become at this day one of the best and delight∣fullest Places that can be found.

The Discoverers at the beginning divided it into four parts, that is, into Monchrico, or Manchico, Santo Cruize, Fonzal, and Camerade Lobes, that is, The Cham∣ber Wolves, so call'd, because at their first coming on Shore they found a great Cave resembling an Arch'd, or Vaulted Room, under a Point of Land reach∣ing into the Sea, where were the prints of the footings of Sea-Wolves.

The chiefest Places of this Island are, the Head-City Funzal, or Funhial, the Seat of the Bishop, comprehending a Collegiate-Church, three other great Churches, two Cloisters, of the Order of St. Francis, one for the Men, built by the King of Portugal, and the other for Virgins, built by Gonzalves, Governor of the Island; and a Colledge for the Jesuits.

Manchico, or Manchrico, shewing a fair Church, nam'd Santa Cruize, and a Cloister of St. Bernard.

Moquet affirms, that the whole contains many Castles, six and thirty emi∣nent Parish-Churches, five Cloisters, four Hospitals, and two and twenty Hermitages.

In the Year Sixteen hundred twenty five, there were computed in this Island six thousand ninety six Houses, which at this day are increased to a greater number.

The Air keeps so even a temperature, that neither Heat or Cold invade it with excess: the Ground enriched by many excellent Springs of fresh Water; and besides fertilitated with the advantage of seven or eight small Rivers; so that every part lies carpetted with a pleasant Verdure, or beautifi'd with the delightful prospect of various Fruits, always flourishing on their natural Stems, and gather'd, as well please the Palate, as the Trees refresh the Body by their cooling shade: But especially it affords an excellent Wine, better in the second and third year than in the first.

The Earth, though Mountainous, affords plenty of Corn that multiplies sixty fold. Cadamast computed the product of one Harvest to thirty thousand Vene∣tian Measures, call'd Stares, every one reckon'd at three and thirty Pound.

The Grass and Trees shoot up so high, that the Inhabitants are necessitated to cut up and burn part of it: in the Ashes whereof they plant Sugar-Canes, which in six Moneths bring forth Sugar: for those planted in January are cut up in June, and so the rest, each according to the Moneth wherein they were planted.

The Trees of most consequence are some that bear Gum, as Sanguis Draconis,

[illustration]

MELITE INSULA vulge MASTA.

mention'd before, and a sort of Guaiacum, but of little esteem, because not so good as that in other Places.

Here is much tame Cattel; as upon the Mountains many wild Swine, Par∣tridges, Doves and Quails.

The Inhabitants are much civiler than those of the Canary-Islands, and Trade with all sorts of Countreys, giving in Exchange for their Commodities, Sugar, Honey, Wax, Oranges, Citrons, Lemons, Pomgranates, Wines, and Lea∣ther.

THe Island of Malta.

THe Name of Malta seems to be derived from Melite, so call'd of old, which not onely the antient Geographers, Strabo, Mela, and Ptolomy, but the holy Scripture it self mentions; though there be another Melite, near the City Ragousa, and the Coast of Damiata, at this day call'd Meleda. Cluverius in his Description of Sicily, supposes that the Iste Hiperia, spoken of by Homer, as the Habitation of the People call'd Phaeacians, who being hunted thence by the Phenycians, took their flight to Corfu, or Scherie, antiently Phaeacia, is no other than this: And assuredly, the Phaeacians were the Inhabitants of Corfu, which came first from Malta, as Homer, by placing the Mountain Melite in Corfu, plainly makes manifest. Cluverius endeavors to maintain by demonstrative rea∣sons, that it was the most antient Ogygia, the Habitation of the Nymph Calipso, Daughter of Oceanus and Thetis, who receiv'd and entertain'd Ulysses suffering Shipwrack, where he stay'd seven years, but at last by the order of Juno was commanded to quit his Mistress, and leave the Countrey.

This Island hath been commonly accounted in Europe, but Ptolomy placeth it in Africa; and the very Tongue there spoken, being broken Arabick, proves it African, no less than its being in the Atlantick Sea, though it seem nearer to Europe.

It lieth in six and forty Degrees of Longitude, and in five and thirty and ten Minutes North-Latitude, or according to Ptolomy, in four and thirty De∣grees forty Minutes, and hath in length, from East to West six Leagues, in breadth three, and in compass fifteen.

It hath on the East, the Mediterranean Sea; on that side next Candia, in the North, the Island of Sicily, not above fifteen Leagues distant; in the South, Tri∣polis, in Barbary and the lesser Africa; in the West, the Islands of Pantalaree, Linose, and Lampadouse. The Sea which divides it from Sicily bears the Name of The Channel of Malta. Ptolomy places there a City of the same Name, and two Tem∣ples, one of Juno, and the other of Hercules.

At this day it contains four Wall'd Cities, besides a great number of Towns; the Cities are, Valette, Citta Vecchia, that is, The Old City, otherwise Old Malta, Biurgo Sante Angelo, or The City of Angels, otherwise Citta Victoriosa, and the City or Town of St. Michael, or Sangde.

Valette, by the Italians call'd Terra Nuova, and by the French, Ville Neuve, gain'd that Name from the Grand Master Jan de Valette, otherwise Parisot, who pre∣sently built it after the Siege of the Turks in the Year Fifteen hundred sixty five, who had then straitned this Island, and taken the Castle St. Elmo, lying before the City.

The City stands founded upon a Rock, and an elevated piece of Ground, call'd Scebarras, which severs the Haven Marza Mazetta, and the Great Haven, being indeed an Isthmus, the Sea beating on three sides of it; and a great Trench hewn out of the Rock, cuts it off from the rest of the Island. On the outmost Point of that Rock, before it, stands the Castle St. Elmo.

It appears very strong, surrounded on the out side with Ditches cut in the Rocks, fortified with Bulwarks, and very delightful Out-works; within beautified with straight and broad Streets, of which the chiefest are Strata Reale, or The High Street; and Strata Merchanti, The Merchants Street. The Houses lofty, built of hewn Stone, with flat Roofs, according to the manner of the Eastern Countreys, to the number of about two thousand. Every House had former∣ly a Cistern to catch Rain-water; but Strangers at this day fetch it from some fair Springs, neighboring the Port del Monto, on the Sea-coast, whither the Wa∣ter hath been brought some Miles out of the Countrey by Conduits; an In∣vention of the Grand Master Alofi Vignacourt, to the great Relief and Comfort as well of the Inhabitants as Foreigners, which lie with their Ships before the City: for the Water spouts by the opening of an Engine in the City, and by Pipes runs into the Cask in the Boats.

Three Gates give entrance into it; one at the Haven call'd Porta del Monte, and two at the Land-side, viz. Porta Reale, and Porta Boucheria, or The Slaughter∣house Gate.

There are seven Churches; the chiefest is that of St. John, the Patron or Guardian-Protector of the Order of the Knights of Malta; on the right side whereof, stands the Figure of that Saint, in a lively Representation. The other are, St. Augustine, St. Dominico, St. Maria Jesus, St. Paulo, Madona de Carmine, Collegio de Jesu, La Madama de la Victoria.

There are also seven Palaces or Courts, call'd Auberge, or Bergia, for the seven Languages; for into so many Nations of several Tongues, are the Knights divided; in every one of which the Superiors have their Residence, and live upon the Expence of the Order: As Bergia or Auberge, di Provence; Bergia de Auvergne or Alvenia, Bergia de France, Bergia di Italia, Bergia di Arragon, Bergia de Alemagna, Bergia di Castilia; that is to say, The Palace or Court of Provence, The Palace of Auvergne, The Palace of France, The Palace of Italy, The Palace of Arragon, Germany, and Spain. Formerly there was a Bergia di Angliterre, but at this day annihilated.

There are several Cloysters; as, of St. Ursula, St. Catherine, and di Repenti. The Palace of the Grand-Master (for here he holds his Court) stands between St. Elmo and St. Johns, wherein is a great Hall, the usual Place for the meeting of the Grand-Master, with the Counsellors, or Knights of the Great Cross.

In the Court behind the Palace, stand fix'd in the Wall the Portraictures of two very ancient Marble Heads, rais'd upon an Arch, bigger than the Life; one with this Inscription, Zenobia Orientalis Domina; and the other; Petesilia. They were found in Malta, in the Year Two hundred seventy six.

They have a Market-place, to which the Countrey People bring all sorts of Fruit, Fowl, Sheep, Goats, Hogs, and other provision, to sell.

Near the Castle of St. Elmo you may see an Hospital, * 1.135 being the House of Entertainment for the Sick; a stately Building, especially since the Enlarge∣ment in the year Sixteen hundred sixty four; wherein every Sick Person hath a Chamber, in a great Hall, thirty Paces long, and ten broad, standing near one to another, on each side five and twenty. The Sick are serv'd in good or∣der,

[illustration]

VALETTA CIVITAS NOVA MALTAE Olim Millitae.

by the Knights themselves, and their Meat made ready in Silver Vessels, as Trenchers, Dishes, Porrengers, and Drinking-Cups, brought to every ones Bed, according to the Prescript of the Physicians, which are usually four, and visit them Morning and Evening.

There is an Arsenal, or Magazine of Arms, * 1.136 under the Inspection of a Ca∣valier, or Knight; wherein they have a very large and stately Hall, compleat∣ly furnish'd with all sorts of Warlike Weapons. In the middle stand five square Wooden Buildings, whose in-sides are adorn'd in very good Order with all sorts of Defensive Arms, as Cuirasses, Coats of Mail, Caskets, Head-pieces, Shields, Back-swords, Halberds, Pikes, Half-Lances, Muskets, Dags, Ponyards, Pistols, Snap-hances, and such like. Above hang many Bowes, and other Wea∣pons, us'd of old by the Knights of Rhodes. In brief, there are sufficient of all sorts to equip six and thirty thousand Men. There are three or four compleat Suits of Armor, Cap-a-pe; the middlemost being that which the Grand Master De la Valette, in the Siege in the year Sixteen hundred sixty five, us'd. There is also a Piece of Cannon upon the Carriage, made of Leather; but with so great Art and Curiosity, that it seems verily an Iron Piece. All these Arms are kept very clean and bright, by Officers to that onely purpose appointed. Every Knight, notwithstanding all this Provision, hath his Arms by himself, in his own House; as have also the Citizens, and Countrey People. The Banjert is a large House or Prison, wherein many Slaves of all Nations are bought and sold.

They have a Custom-house, Treasury, Chancery, and Magazine for Wine and Corn; a Castle for the Courts of Justice, Princely Stables for Horses, and a separate Field, with all Conveniences, for the Founding of Great Ordnance.

The Castle of St. Elmo, built upon a Rock, on the Out-point of Valette to∣wards the Sea, is as it were encompass'd with several fair and large Havens; three on the right side, and five on the left; all guarded by the Castle of St. An∣gelo, built on the Point of Burgo, or Citta Vittorioso. Between this Castle and Va∣lette are Corn-pits hewn in the Rocks.

In the great Haven over against Valette, are two long slips of Land, * 1.137 with their Points; in one whereof, seated upon a Rock, lieth the Castle St. Angelo; and besides it, nothing remarkable, but an old small Church, built first by the Clergy of this Order, wherein you may see the Tomb of the Grand-Master Philip de Villiers d' Isle Dam, who there with the Order, after the loss of Rhodes, in the year Fifteen hundred and thirty, the six and twentieth of October, took his first Residence, after eight Years Adventures. It was formerly strengthen'd with many Bulwarks and Walls; provided with Wells of Water, a Magazine of Arms, together with a Palace for the Knights: but since the Siege of the Turks, in the Year Sixteen hundred fifty five, greatly decay'd. Here stands al∣so an Hospital for sick and poor Diseased Mariners, who are serv'd by the Ju∣nior Knights, with Silver Vessels, in good order. Lastly, A Yard or Dock for the Building of Galleys, with Barrakes or Store-houses adjoyning; neighbor'd by the stately Mansion of the General of the Galleys.

Beyond this, upon the same Rock, stands Citta Vittorioso, so call'd because of the foremention'd Siege which it endur'd from the Turks.

It was built by the Grand Master Philip de Villiers d' Isle Dam, when the Knights had first the Possession of this Island given them; and at this day con∣veniently Fortified. It contains in Circuit half a Mile, wherein about twelve hundred Houses, and these following Churches, viz. St. Andria, Maria della

Carne, St. Spirito Santo, St. Laurenzo; by the Market La Muneiata, St. Scholastique, a Cloyster of Nuns, and Grecian Church. The Inquisitor hath there also a Palace for his Residence.

On the other Slip of Land, * 1.138 more inwards, lieth the City call'd La Isula, at the East end whereof stands St. Michaels Fort, parted only from the main Land by a deep Trench; the whole erected about the year Fifteen hundred and six, by the Grand Master Claudius de la Sangle, and now strongly Fortified accord∣ing to the Modern way. It hath in compass about a small Mile, and chiefly in∣habited by Mariners, who continually keep Vessels abroad against the Turks.

Between Burgo and La Isula lies a Haven, wherein all the Capers and Galleys of Malta harbor, with their Prizes, as well Turks as Christians: The Entrance, at the coming of the Turkish Fleet, was chain'd up. In La Isula are four Churches; Maria Porto Salvo, Madama de Victoria, St. Philippo Nere, and St. Julian. At the end of the Haven, beyond the City, on the East side, lieth Burmola, as being with∣out the City, inhabited by Strangers; together with two Havens, one call'd La Marza, and the other La Marza Picciola, that is, The Small Haven.

Citta Vecchia, * 1.139 or The Old City, which Ptolomy call'd by the Name of the Island Melite; and others, Old Malta, is said to have been built by the Carthaginians; but the Inhabitants know it by the Name of Medina, deriv'd from the Arabick Language, in memory of the Arabians, who so call'd it, from a City of the same denomination in Arabia, the Sepulchre of Mahomet.

The principal Church is that of St. Peters, being the first which the Christi∣ans built in this Island, after the Preaching of the Apostle St. Paul. Without the City stands another, dedicated to St. Agatha, where, upon the Altar, sits a white Marble Image of St. Agatha Preaching. Under this Church is a Grot, with two or three Entrances; yet few People venture into it, because of the several strange Meanders, and dismal narrowness of the place; and therefore one of these Entrances, being more dangerous than the rest, was closed up by Command. They go in by a Rope, made fast above, by which they slide down, carrying with them burning Torches.

Towns, * 1.140 in Italian call'd Casals, and by the Inhabitants, in Arabick, Adhamet; Jerome of Alexandria, in his Siege of Malta, computed to be about five and forty; Bosio, to forty; others, scarce to six and thirty: but the Knights themselves, according to Davity, reckon them sixty.

The Parish (a) 1.141 Naxarro (for this Island the Knights have divided into seve∣ral Parishes) hath under it, according to Bosio, the Towns of Gregoor, (b) 1.142 Mu∣sta, and Muslimet; the Parish Bircarcara, the Towns Tard, Lia, Balsan, Bordi, and Man: Then followeth the Parish of Cordi, but without any annexions: The Parish of St. Mary of (c) 1.143 Birmiftuch contains the Towns Luka, Tarcien, Gu∣dia, Percop or Corcap, (d) 1.144 Saphi, (e) 1.145 Mikabiba, and Farrugh; That of (f) 1.146 Siguiau, the Towns (g) 1.147 Quibir, (h) 1.148 Siluch, and Cidere; That of (i) 1.149 St. Catherine, the Towns Biscatia, Zakar, Asciak, Gioanni, and Bisbu; The Parish of Zarrik takes in (k) 1.150 Cren∣di, Leu, (l) 1.151 Meleri, (m) 1.152 Bukakra, and Maim: Then the Parochial Towns of Za∣bugi, Muxi, and Alduvi; and lastly, that of Dingli, comprehending some small Villages.

Two or three Miles Northward of Valetta, appeareth Nasciaro, grac'd with a very fine Church, to which adjoyns a Garden of Pleasure, call'd by the name of the Grand Master, St. Anthony, being very large, and divided into several Quarters, all full of Vines, Oranges, Lemons, Pomegranates, Citrons, Olives, and other Fruit-Trees; together with a handsom Palace, having many Rooms

of Entertainment, besides private Recesses, and particular Apartments: This, in regard of its distance, is not so much frequented, as that of San Gioseppo, be∣ing nearer, whither the Grand Masters and the whole Court often retire for Recreation.

On the South-Coast, and that side towards Tripolis, this Island hath nothing but great Cliffs and Rocks; but on the other side, several Capes, convenient for small Boats. First, passing to the East, you come to the Haven of Marza Scola (Marza signifies A Haven) and a small Mile from thence, to the South-West of Sirok, to Marza Sirokko, that is, The South-West Port, being very large and capacious. From thence turning to the South, you may see Golpho de Pietra Santa, or Holy Stone Gulph, opposite to the small Island Fursula, or Forrola.

But to the Westward appear two great Roads; one call'd Antfega, but ac∣cording to the Maltesian Orthography, Hayntoffeka; and the other, Porto del Mugaro. Passing thence Westwards, you arrive at Meleca, a good Landing-place, over against which the Island Goze shews it self, sever'd from Malta by a narrow Channel, intituled Feo.

The Eastern Coast brings you to Porto delle Saline Vecchie, The Haven of the Old Salt-Pit.

Right out from thence, over against Sicily, you come to Cala di Sante Paulo, The Cape of St. Paul, and by that a Bay; so call'd, because the Inhabitants be∣lieve, That the Ship wherein the Apostle Paul was brought over Captive, by Storm was cast away, and Shipwrack'd against this Place; though some (with what Reason we will not determine) imagine that Shipwrack to have been suffer'd not here, but upon the Island Melite by Ragousa.

This Bay sends an Arm well near two Italian Miles up into the Countrey; but neither broad, nor deep. The adjacent Shore being full of Rocks, scarce∣ly appearing above the Surface of the Water, confirms the Arguments of St. Paul's Shipwrack here. In the place where the Viper leap'd out of the Fire to the hand of the Apostle, the first converted Christians erected a small Chappel, being since decay'd by Wind and Weather; but of late renew'd again: So that now there stands a handsom little Church, rebuilt in the Year Sixteen hundred and sixteen, by the Grand Master Alophi Tignacourt. Above the Altar in the Church are to be seen divers Images decyphering the Miracle done by the Apostle, in flinging off the Viper from his Hand, himself kneeling; with ma∣ny Figures of Men and Women, bigger than the Life, round about, in Old Maltesia Garments, cut out with excellent Postures, to admiration. Above this Altar-piece, stands this Inscription in Latin:

Vipera, Ignis acta Calore, frustra Pauli manum invadit: is Insulae benedicens Anguibus & Herbis adimit omne virus. M. DC. V. (That is) The Viper, constrain'd by the Heat of the Fire, leap'd in vain upon the Hand of Paul: He blessing the Island, took away all Poyson from the Serpents and Plants. 1605.

Close by the Sea is a Rock, with a small Pit, out of which very sweet and rellishing Water issues, which they say came miraculously, by the Apostles

striking the Rock, for want of Water to quench his thirst. A little more Sou∣therly lies a Salt-pit, call'd Saline Nova; and close by it, under the Shore, the Island Gallis. Towards the South you have Cala di Marco, and Cala di St. George: And lastly, Punta di Dragut, over against Valetta, and the Castle of St. Elmo. There are moreover two Havens; one stil'd Marza di Musseto, and the other call'd Mar∣za, or Il Porto Grande, The Great Haven, between Valetta and Fort St. Angelo; whose Entrance, call'd Bocca el Porto, is defended on the one side by a Redoubt rais'd upon the Point; and on the other side, by the Great Guns of the Bulwark of Valetta.

South-Westwards from Old Malta, * 1.153 the Grand Master hath his fairest Garden of Pleasure, call'd Boschetto, seated on the top of a high Rock, not without great Charge, all the Earth being carried up to it; and planted with Orange, Lemon, Citron, Pomegranate, Olive, and other Trees; together with several rare and unusual Plants: Near which he hath a Park of Deer, a Warren of Hares, Coneys, and a Wood of Olive-Trees, wherein breed Stags and Hinds; besides several excellent natural Springs, and rare artificial Water-works; and a Pa∣lace beautified with spacious Halls and Chambers, with a flat Roof, upon which some Pieces of Ordnance are planted: From this Place you will easily believe the Prospect cannot be unpleasant. Between this Court Boschetto, and Old Malta, lies Gardino del Vescone, The Garden of the Bishop.

Not far from Citta Vecchia may be seen a Grot of white, but soft Stone, wherein the Apostle Paul, after his Shipwrack, Preach'd: And three Italian Miles further, * 1.154 the Court Balda, or Vassalo, extraordinarily frequented; for it hath an Orchard so fruitful, that the like is not in the whole Island; planted with many sorts of very large Grapes, white and brown Figs, and delicious Peaches, with a most delightful Fountain. A Mile without Valette lieth a Cloy∣ster, call'd St. Mattheo della Makkluba, where, upon St. Matthias day, a great Fair is holden.

Fifty or sixty Paces from that Cloyster, formerly stood the Town Makkluba, but now quite swallow'd up in Earth, nothing remaining but a Hole forty or fifty Fathom deep, and in the opening at the top, five hundred Paces in com∣pass.

Three Miles from thence, right over against the Island Forfala, you arrive at Gibel Ciantor, containing a Garden, and small Church, under which is a Cave, with a very fair Spring, furnish'd with a Stone Table, and Seat, for those that come thither to recreate and take their pleasure. From this place runneth a steep winding Way, from below, to the top of the Mountain; and from thence another, as rugged and rocky, to Boschetto before-mention'd.

The Ground, * 1.155 or rather the Rocks (which are most of them black, yellow, and soft, and therefore easie to be wrought) they say, that since the Apostle Saint Paul did that Miracle there, have been blessed, with producing certain great and small Serpents Tongues, of several colours and forms; as also of round Orange colour'd, and black Serpents eyes and Teeth, and certain Scaly Stones, in the form of a Serpents Skin; besides several other rarities, so shap'd, that they seem to represent the Life. These Eyes and Serpents Tongues, they say, have a wonderful vertue in them, against all sorts of Poyson, and Bitings of Venomous Beasts; not onely to preserve from the hurt, but afford a power∣full Remedy to such as have taken Poyson, or been bitten by any Venomous Creature; yea some have no less commended them than the Bezoar-Stone in Europe.

The manner of using these Stones, is thus; The Eyes are commonly worn upon the Ring-finger, as a pretious Stone, so that it may touch the bare Skin, and the Tongues upon the Neck and Arms, Water, or Wine, or some other moysture mingled therewith and taken, or therein for a while laid to steep, or else Wine or Water, drank out of Cups or Cans made thereof: Also the Stone of St. Paul's Cave, being very white and soft, hath the like vertue ascribed to it against all Biting and Stinging of Venomous Beasts.

The whole Island stands upon a Rock, so that no place can be found, where the Earth lieth more than four Foot deep; the best quarter is about Boschetto, and if the rest of the Island were as this, the Knights would not need to fetch their Provisions from abroad; yet notwithstanding the natural unfruitfulness, by labour and diligence, the Soyl brings forth many things, particularly Corn, but in no great abundance, for all will not suffice to feed the Inhabitants above three moneths; the rest they fetch from Sicily, and other places.

Cummin, in the Arabick call'd Camum or Cemum, and by the Indians in the Malayan Tongue, Jenta Nyeran, they Sowe in great quantity, because it thrives, as delighting in a stony Soil. They have of two sorts, one white, slender and sharp, of a rank smell, and tart in taste, call'd Cimonageron, that is, wild Cum∣min, and like the Ethiopian Cummin of the Apothecaries: The other much smaller, like Annise-seed, whitish, having a deadish taste, and sweetish. The first they use in stead of Spice, the other the Inhabitants mix with Bread, to give it a pleasant relish; from hence they are brought all over Europe.

Also Cotton, as good, if not much better than grows any where else; onely we must observe, that the Cotton Planted here is but an Herb or Shrub, with a stalk of a Foot and half long, sown, and dying every year; but the other which grows in Egypt, and all over Assia, shoots up to the height of a Tree, with a Stem, and hard wooddy Boughs. The Fruit of this Maltesian Plant, grows to the bigness of a Hasle-Nut, those that are ripe split open into three or four sharp Wedges, out of which the soft white Wooll appears, inclosing within a slender white and Oily Seed, in taste like an Almond or Pine-Kernel.

The Inhabitants Sowe it upon the Barly-Land, after the Crop taken off, that is, in April and May, and pulled up in September. It groweth also in Lemnos, Can∣dia, Sicily, and France, brought thither out of Italy. They say, the profit arising thereby every year, amounts to three hundred Cantares of Cotton, every Cantare being a hundred weight.

Many sorts of Flowers, especially Roses of a lovely smell, flourish here; be∣sides Thime, and all sorts of Herbs, of a most pleasant taste. And the Vines bear Grapes, as big as Plums, both white and red, which hang five Moneths in the year ripe on the Vine. They have also Olives, Almonds, very excellent Figgs, sweet and sharp Citrons, of an extraordinary bigness and beauty. Apricocks, and very large Peaches, besides Melons, Dates, and other Fruits, common in Europe. For want of Wood they burn the Dung of Beasts dry'd in the Sun, or wild Thistles: But some of the better sort use the Wood of Olive-Trees for Fuel, brought from Cicily, and sold by the pound.

The Villagers keep many Sheep, Goats, Hogs; Mules, and Asses, * 1.156 which serve in stead of Horses: Their working-Horses, to the number of about four or five hundred, are all Unshod, and fed onely with Straw and Fetches. Conies, and Hares, Partridges, and Quails breed here in great numbers; but Falcons and many other Fowl flock thither, especially in March and September, in great mul∣titudes out of other Countries.

The People of Bosio are of opinion, that not so much as one Serpent is found upon this Island, nor any other Venomous Creature; and that if any be brought from other places, they die presently. But Crusius affirms, there are Serpents and Scorpions, but without Poyson, caus'd by the Benediction of the Apostle, since his Shipwrack, and the shaking of the Viper from his hand into the fire; insomuch, that no person born in Malta, (others say also, of all Nations that inhabit there) can receive hurt from them; and confirm it by Occular Testimony, That several Persons, Young, and Old, have play'd with, handled, and held them to their naked Breasts and Bodies, without receiving the least hurt.

Men and Women of Quality, * 1.157 go Clothed after the Cicilian and Italian man∣ner; but the Villagers wear a small and single Coat, call'd Capotin, which co∣vers half their Thighs, with a Cape, and a blew Cap upon their heads; and some have Shooes of rough Goats Leather, ty'd with a Leather Point; but Fo∣raigners go every one Habited according to the fashion of his Countrey.

The Natives use a proper and peculiar Tongue, * 1.158 that is, broken Arabick, and every Town almost hath a peculiar Tone and Propriety: The Vulgar can speak no other than their Mother-Tongue, but the Citizens have learnt Italian and French.

Their Marriages are made by giving of a Handkerchief, and the Bride and Bridegroom commonly lie together before the perfecting of Ecclesiastical Ce∣remonies.

They Bury their Dead after the Grecian fashion, * 1.159 that is, hiring Mourners to follow the Corps, who for their small stipend, not onely make hideous Ulu∣lations, but tear their Hair, and scratch their Faces; the Friends cutting their Hair off, and casting it upon the Corps.

Most of the Inhabitants are poor, * 1.160 because of the infertility of the place, and maintain themselves by Planting Cummin-seed and Cotton, which they ex∣change with those of Cicily for Corn, Wine, fresh and salted Flesh, Pease and Beans, Oil, and other Commodities.

The Countrey People use long Swords, * 1.161 and great Daggers, Lances or Darts, not less than our Half-Pikes, which they use with great dexterity on Horseback; but the Knights have Muskets, and other Fire-Arms.

The Walls, Bulwarks, Breast-works; Cities and Castles, are Fortifi'd with great numbers of Ordnance, besides the beforemention'd Armory in Valetta; and seven well Rigg'd and stoutly Man'd Galleys, which the Knights of the Order always keep ready for Fighting, Commanded by an Admiral, who car∣ries a Silver Cross in his Flag, upon a Red Field; so that the Italians Proverbi∣ally say of this Island, Malta fior del Mundo, Malta is the Flower of the World; part∣ly in respect of their Arms, Fortifications, and Castles; partly because of the valiant Defenders, the Malta Knights, who have had their abode here many years.

They suppose at this day there are upon the whole Island Forty thousand Souls, the Knights and Souldiers included. In the Year Fifteen hundred and ninety, the number of them (according to Bosio) was no more than seven and twenty thousand, but since greatly increas'd.

In the two Burgs, lie near two thousand Men; the Knights keep about four hundred Horses to serve in the Wars, which every six Moneths are Train'd and Muster'd; besides, every Knight who hath four hundred Scudi, must keep a Horse in his Stable ready for service.

This Island was antiently under the Jurisdiction of King Battus, * 1.162 an Enemy of Queen Dido, but afterwards Subjected to the Carthagenians; as at this day many Stone Columns found therein, and Insculp'd with Punick Letters. Af∣terwards the Romans became Masters of it, at the same time when they Con∣quer'd Cicily, by whom deserted, the Mahumetans took into possession, about the Year of our Lord, Eight hundred twenty eight; but they were driven thence in the Year One thousand and ninety, by Roger the Norman, Duke of Cicily, who reduced it under his own Power, from whom it remain'd under the King of Cicily, till overcome by the Emperor Charles the First, after his Conquest of Cicily and Naples, who gave it away to the Knights of St. Johns Order, then call'd Knights of Rhodes, and at this day Malta Knights; as appeareth by Monimus of Utina, exhorting Philip the Second to recieve them.

But for the better information of the beginning and continuance of this Or∣der of Knights, the Possessors and Lords of this Island, it will be necessary to deduce the matter somewhat higher.

When the City Jerusalem was exceedingly harrased by the Saracens, * 1.163 who pos∣sess'd the same, Califf Aron used the Christians more gently, because of a good understanding between Charles the Great, first Emperor of Germany and him; but after his death, this City fell into greater miseries, by quarrels between the Ma∣humetans of Persia and Egypt, for now it was under the Persians, and then under the Egyptians, who at last growing Masters of the Holy-Land, treated the Christians very severely, and caused the Church of the Holy-Sepulchre to be Ruin'd, which remain'd seven and thirty years desolate, till the Raign of Con∣stantine Monamaque, Emperor of Constantinople, who Rebuilt it at his own Charge, with the consent of Bomensor, Califf of Bomansar, by others call'd Maabad Abuta∣min, Mustansir Billa, Son of Ali Taher, in the Year One thousand forty eight.

At the same time some Nobles and Italian Merchants of the City Amalfi, in the Kingdom of Naples, visited much the Havens and Sea-Towns of Syria and Egypt, carrying thither by Shipping rare and precious Commodities, which were so acceptable to the Natives of that Countrey, that the bringers were re∣spected by all persons, even the Governors and Califfs themselves; by which means they had liberty to Trade every where, and visit the City of Jerusalem, and the Holy-Land: But they having no Dwelling-place for their abode, nor any Church to exercise their Religion, concluded to intreat the Califf of Egypt to grant them a place in Jerusalem, whereon they might build a Church, with a house for their abode, who immediately granted them a place near The Church of the Resurrection, where they afterwards built a Church to the honor of the Virgin Mary, with a Cloyster and House. Afterwards they sent for from the Mountain Cassin, an Abbot, with Monks of the Order of St. Benedict, to whom they gave the same Church and Cloyster, with a proviso to receive and enter∣tain all Christian Pilgrims or Travellers; and this Church was call'd St. Mary the Latin, because built by the Latin Christians. On the report of this Work be∣gun, many Men and Women betook themselves thither: And therefore that the Women might have a more honorable abode, another Cloyster was built, by the name of St. Mary Magdalene, into which a certain number of Religious Women betook themselves, to receive and entertain all Pilgrimesses which came thither. But when at last these Cloysters began to grow too small for such great numbers as thither resorted, the Sisterhood concluded to build a great Hospital or Alms-house, for entertainment both of Sick and Well; and put at the same time an Overseer therein, chosen by the Abbot. They built

also next it a Church, by the name of St. John Baptist, because they had under∣stood, That Zacharias, the Father of St. John Baptist, had often travell'd to this Place.

These Cloysters, and this Hospital, for want of Revenues, were only main∣tain'd by Alms, sent to them by those of Amalfi, and other parts of Italy which Traded in Syria; which continu'd as long as Jerusalem remain'd in the Hands of the Infidels: In which time a certain Holy Person, by name Gerard, was Overseer of this Hospital; and over the Cloyster of Women, a Roman Virgin call'd Agnes. When this Gerard had serv'd this Hospital a long time, he con∣cluded, with the Advice of his Benefactors, to take upon him the Apparel or Habit which the Knights at this day wear; that is, a black Cloke or Coat, with a white eight-pointed Cross upon it. The like the Abbess Agnes and their Institution was allow'd by Pope Honorius the Second, and the Patriarch of Je∣rusalem. Gramay affirms, That at the intreaty of this Gerard, this Order was allow'd in the year Eleven hundred and thirteen, by Pope Paschal the Second, under the Discipline of St. Augustine, which hath been ever since follow'd by them: And likewise the same Pope Paschal took the same Gerard, and these Hospitallers (for so they were at first call'd, from this Hospital) under his Pro∣tection, and granted them great Priviledges, commanding, That after the death of this Gerard, they should chuse another Governor, to whom was given the Title of Master of the Order of St. John of Jerusalem. Megisser affirms, That when the Christian Princes had Besieg'd Jerusalem, under the Conduct of Godfrey of Bouillon, Duke of Lorain, as Chief Commander, these Hospitallers joyn'd privately with him, and by means of their Assistance beat the Turks, and won the City, in the year Eleven hundred and nineteen. This Godfrey of Bouillon, being afterward chosen King of Jerusalem by the Christians, gave to this Order great Gifts, and put into their Hands the Government of many Towns, to de∣fend the same.

In the year Eleven hundred seventy eight, these Hospitallers fought with Sa∣ladine Caliph of Egypt, and won a great Victory; but with the loss of the Grand Master De Mozins; there remaining on the Mahumetan side above five thousand slain. In like manner, the Knights in the same year, in July, under the Com∣mand of the Grand Master Garnier, gave a bloody Battel to that Enemy, wherein Guy the Christian King of Jerusalem, and the chiefest of the Realm re∣main'd Prisoners, * 1.164 with a downfall of all the Knights: The Grand Master himself mortally wounded, died of his Wounds ten days afterwards.

The twelfth of October, * 1.165 in the same Year, Jerusalem was Conquer'd by Sala∣dine; by which means, all the Christians of the Latin Church, and these Hospi∣tallers, were driven out of the City, which with their own Money redeem'd above thirty thousand Prisoners. These did aid the Christian Princes very much, in the regaining of the Holy Land, and the City Akre, which hapned in the year Eleven hundred ninety one, the twelfth of July, at which place they have since had their usual abode: And notwithstanding the loss of Jerusalem, the Hospitallers and Templars remain'd Masters over one part of the King∣dom of Jerusalem, and made Ameury van Ansignan, King of Cyprus, King of Jeru∣salem; but after his decease, the Knights and Templars govern'd it themselves, under the Grand Master Godfrey Rat, as Chief Commander.

About the year Twelve hundred twenty five, these Knights overcame the City Damiata in Egypt, under the Conduct of the Grand Master Guerin de Mon∣taign.

In the Year twelve hundred and sixty, under the Grand Master Haegues de Revel, they took from the Saracens the Castle of Lebion; whereupon the Sultan concluded to destroy and root out all the Hospitallers, and to that end Besieged and took the Castle of Assur in the Year One thousand two hundred sixty five; and the following year the Hospitallers and Templars were beaten by the City Ptolemais, or Alkre, or Acon; three years afterwards they lost the Castle of Krak, or Montreol.

In the Year Twelve hundred eighty two, * 1.166 the Hospitallers obtain'd a great Victory under the Grand Master Nicholas de Orgui, against the Turks, Besieging the Castle of Margat, their chiefest strength; which yet was deliver'd up in the Year twelve hundred eighty five to the Sultan Melechsait; from whence they went to the City Alkre, but stay'd not there; for by the loss of Tripoli in Syria, and likewise of Sidon and Barut, in the Year twelve hundred eighty nine; and the before-nam'd Alkre, in the Year Twelve hundred ninety one, the eighteenth of May, to the Sultan Melekseraf, all the Christians, and by consequence these Knights were utterly expell'd out of the Holy-Land, after a possession of a hun∣dred ninety one Years, ten Moneths, and three days, since the winning thereof by Godfrey of Bouillon.

The Knights betook themselves from thence to the Island of Cyprus, under the Grand Master Jan de Villices, where the King gave him and the Templars the City and Haven of Timesso for their abode.

Pope Clement the First, granted afterwards to this Order, all the Goods and Lands which they took from the Infidels; for which cause they gathered a strong Army, under the Command of the Grand Master Foulques Villaret, and took Rhodes from the Turks, with several other adjacent Islands; whereupon they remov'd from Cyprus to Rhodes, and were since call'd The Knights of Rhodes. About this time the Order of Knights Templars was suppress'd, and their Goods conferr'd upon these Knights by the Pope.

A long time they defended Rhodes against the assaults of the mahumetans, chiefly in the time of Habusar, Sultan of Egypt, who Besieg'd it five years; and in the Year Fourteen hundred and eight, the Grand-Seignior Mahomet, or Mihammed, attempted with an Army of Three hundred thousand Men, but was necessita∣ted to leave it with a great loss of Soldiers; but at last the Bassa Ibrahim, by the Command of Solyman the Magnificent, overcame the City, and the whole Island in the Year Fifteen hundred twenty two, on the day of St. John Baptist, having an Army of two hundred thousand men, whereof the Siege devour'd above a hundred thousand, whereas the Island was scarce furnish'd with six hundred Knights, and five thousand Inhabitants.

After the loss of this Island, they went away from it, according to the Agree∣ment made with the Turks, and Landed first at Castro in Candia, but went thence to Messina in Cicilia; and from thence, in the Year Fifteen hundred twenty three, to Civita Vecchia; thence again to Viterbo, a City in Tuskani, where the Pope en∣tertain'd them a while; they went from Viterbo in July, in the Year Fifteen hundred twenty seven, to Cornetto, from thence to Franche, and from Franche to Nize in Savoy: out of this, in the Year Fifteen hundred twenty nine, they betook themselves to the City Auguste in Cicilia, and from thence to Sarragoa, where they remain'd by leave of the Emperor Charles the First, who took a great content in them for their Valor, which they manifested every where, to the destroying of the Turks and Corsairs; insomuch, that Charles at last, in the Year Fifteen hundred and thirty, the four and twentieth of March, out of a volun∣tary

Donation, transferr'd the Tenancy to the Knights of the Islands of Malta and Goza aforemention'd, with a Proviso to give every year for an Acknow∣ledgment, a Falcon, which the Grand Master should bring himself, or send to the Vice-Roy of Sicily.

In the same Year, * 1.167 the six and twentieth of October, the Knights took posses∣sion thereof, under the Grand Master Philip de Villiers, and have since that been call'd, The Knights of the Order of St. John of Jerusalem in Malta, or singly, Knights of Malta.

The intention of instituting this Order in the beginning, was to serve the Pilgrims which travell'd to Jerusalem, and to assist them with all their Power to keep the Ways secure for such as travel'd to visit the Holy Sepulchres. But at this day their chiefest business is against the Turk, and all Infidels, and to serve Christendom as a Buckler of Defence against them.

These Knights glory in themselves, * 1.168 that they are an Order which hitherto hath had no other Foes, than those that are Enemies to the Name of Christ, be∣ing a renown'd as well as an admirable Institution, without advantage, or any other reward than that of Vertue, their probity continually exercising it self in the prudent Education of its noble Posterity, even with the hazard of their lives; and wishing nothing else, but to persevere in the shewing of their Valor in Fighting against the Wicked. They manage great Wars against the Turks and all Infidells, without joyning or confederating with any Party in the Quarrel of Christendome, and are by all Christian Princes known to be impar∣tial, being indeed an Order consisting of the flower of the Nobility of all Eu∣rope, establish'd in the defence of Christian Princes, who by their glorious En∣terprises of a renown'd and Holy War, have five whole Ages approv'd them∣selves famous and honourable towards Christendom, and at all times formidable to their Enemies. They have in Services and Warlike Exploits so highly merited of the Roman Emperors, Kings, and other Christian Princes, that they stand in a perpetual League with them, and have been receiv'd into the Prote∣ction of the Roman Empire, according to the purport of the Letters from the Emperor Charles the fifth given and granted at Antwerp, the four and twentieth of May, in the Year Fifteen hundred and forty, where he saith:

The aforesaid Order many years since, and even beyond imagination, have been a conti∣nual Defence against the Turk, that great Persecutor of our Faith, and have most valiantly spent their Blood against him for the defence of Religion, and performed many excellent Deeds; whereupon our Predecessors, Roman Emperors and Kings, have receiv'd them into singular Protection and Favor.

The Popes, who confirm'd the Institution of this Order, held to be Tem∣poral and Secular, not onely in respect of their chiefest Employment, but for that they stand exempted both in their Persons and Goods, from the Power and Authority of the Clergy. All Temporal Princes and Lords in their Leagues with this Order, have always distinguish'd them from the Spiritual, neither are their Goods chargeable with Impositions as those comprised under the Colledges, or Cloisters of other Spiritual Societies.

This Order possesses in several Countreys of Europe, * 1.169 as in France, Spain, Por∣tugal, Germany, the Spanish Netherlands, many Houses and Goods of the Coun∣trey, call'd Commanderies, that is, Offices, Places, and Governments.

This Order used formerly, * 1.170 in the time of the Spaniards, to possess se∣veral Goods and Commanderies in the United Netherlands, especially at Harlem, call'd The Goods of the Order of St. Johns-House in Harlem, which they hold to be

wholly incorporated and annexed to the Grand Master of Malta, and the Grand Prior.

Many times have the Knights requested of that State the appointment of these Commanderies, particularly the Grand Master Laskaris himself, by Let∣ters of the fifteenth of September, in the Year Sixteen hundred fifty two, request∣ed of the States, that by their Authority they might be admitted to the Baili∣wick of Utrecht, the Commanderie of Haerlem, and other Goods, within their hands: and farther to that end sent Ambassadors to present their Case to the Assembly of the States, but could never reap any fruit of their Design. Over all the Goods in the Netherlands, the Landgrave of Hess, Grand Prior and su∣preme Master of this Order in Germany, hath obtain'd the Investiture.

These Knights set a high esteem upon their Rights and Priviledges, that they may employ them to the designed use in their Hospital, and the Holy War against the Infidels: and also for that they approve the honorable Re∣ward of their Order, for whose prudent and illustrious Deeds against the Infi∣dels, they say they were granted them.

The Knights of this Order are distinguish'd into several ranks: * 1.171 The first are Noble Knights, call'd Knights of Justice, and bear a Cross of Gold: These must shew a Noble or Gentile Extract for four Descents both of Fathers and Mothers side, before they can be receiv'd. Also Knights of Grace, or Favor; but they differ little from the first, onely that they cannot come to the Dignity of the great Cross, nor of Grand-Master.

There are Priests which celebrate Mass, but give Money for their recepti∣on into this Order; besides the Friers Servants at Arms, being Spiritual Per∣sons, wearing a Cross of Cloth upon their Cloak, but by permission of the Grand-Master, they may wear one of Gold: These are appointed to Offices, having small Commanderies under them, and obtain Place in the Order, after four Expeditions in the Galleys, or ten years abode in Malta. The Priests make but two Expeditions in the Galleys, yet there is but one of them in eve∣ry Galley, call'd The Prior of the Galley.

Some Inhabitants in the Islands wear a half Cross, and therefore call'd De∣micrucians, by that means free from Taxes and Imposts, but never admitted, nor can execute a Commanderie, nor have Dignities in the Order.

Pensioners Donatists, that is, such as are presented with no other intent than to serve the Auberges, and maintain'd by the Knights of every Language to which they belong.

All the Knights are distinguished into eight several Languages: * 1.172 The first is of Provence; these are honour'd with the Dignities of Commanders, * 1.173 of Grand-Prior of St. Giles, the Grand-Prior of Tholouse, and Bailiff of Monosque. In the Priory of St. Giles is fifty Commanderies, that is, inferior Governments, and in that of Tholouse, five and thirty.

The second, that of Avergne: Of these is the Marshal of the Order, * 1.174 the Grand-Prior of Avergne, who hath under him forty Commanderies, and eight Servants, the Bailiff of Laureal, at this day Lyons.

The third is that of France: Of these is the Grand-Hostilier, * 1.175 the Grand-Prior of France, with five and forty Commanderies under them; the Prior of Aquitain, with sixty five; the Prior of Champain, with four and twenty; the Baili∣wick of Moree; and lastly the Grand-Treasurer.

The fourth, that of Italy: * 1.176 Among these we have the Admiral of the Order of Rome, with nineteen Commanderies under him; the Prior of Lombardy,

with five and forty; the Prior of Venice, with seven and twenty; the Priors of Barlette and Capove, who together have five and twenty; the Prior of Messine, with twelve; the Prior of Pise, with six and twenty; the Bailiff of St. Euphe∣mie; of St. Stephen of Monopoli; of the Holy Trinity of Venice; and of St. John of Naples.

The fifth of Arragon, * 1.177 containing Arragon, Catalonia, and Navarre: Out of these they chuse the Grand Protector of the Order; the Grand Prior of Arragon, otherwise the Castilian of Emposte, having nine and twenty Commanderies; the Prior of Catalonia, eight and twenty; the Prior of Navarre, seventeen; and the Bailiff of the City of Caps, or Capes in Barbary, while Tripolis was under the Chri∣stians, but now totally lost.

The sixth, * 1.178 that of England, which comprehended the Turcopoliers, the Priors of England and Ireland, with two and thirty Commanderies: but these have been suppressed many years.

The seventh, * 1.179 of Germany; whence is elected the Grand Bailiff; the Prior of Germany, at this present the Landgrave of Hess, a Prince of the Empire, who by vertue thereof hath under him in high and low Germany sixty seven Comman∣deries; yet those in the United Netherlands have been seiz'd and alienated seve∣ral years. Within this also are comprised the Prior of Bohemia and Hungarie, and the Bailiff of Brandenburgh.

The eighth is the Language of Castile, * 1.180 containing Leon and Portugal. This furnisheth Persons for the Dignity of the Grand Chancellor of the Order, the Priories of Castile and Leon, with seven and twenty Commanderies under them; the Priory of Portugal, with one and thirty; the Bailiff of Povede; the Bailiwicks of Negropont lies common to Castile and Arragon.

All Knights are receiv'd into this Order, * 1.181 if they can shew their Gentility be∣fore the Commissaries, appointed by the Provincial Chapiters, and in their absence, the Senior Deputy.

The Servants, or Ministring Friers, and Priests or Chaplains, shew the Ho∣nesty of their Parents, and their own good Education.

Out of this number are chosen the Master of the Court of the Grand Master, the chief Esquire or Armour-bearer, his Deputy, and the Judge-Advocate.

All receiv'd into this Order make three Promises, * 1.182 or Vows, viz. of Chastity, Obedience, and voluntary Poverty, with promising moreover to wage War against the Idolaters and Mahumetans.

Every Brother, or Knight, is bound to wear a black Mantle, with a white eight-pointed Cross, and in the time of War, a red Mandilion, or Cassock over their Armour, which they call the Sopravest, or upper Garment, with a white Cross, but not eight-pointed, as upon the Mantle: But such as have resided ten years in Malta, and made four Expeditions in Person in the Galleys, may wear the great Cross upon the Breast; yet they must afterwards present their Request in full Council. The Grand Master, the Bishop of Malta, the Prior of the Church of St. John, the Conventual and Capital Bailiffs, wear the great Cross upon their Breasts; but all the other, the little One. Every Brother by obligation must every day repeat an hundred and fifty Pater Nosters for such as have been slain in their Wars: But the Priests, Deacons, Sub-Deacons, and Clerks, perform other Offices. All (except the Sons of great Lords, generated by a Father, Grandfather, and great Grandfather of Temporal Nobility) Sons of covetous Persons, or that are sprung from Saracens, or Mahumetans, (though

deriving from the greatest Princes) such as do Homage to any other Order, (though by the appointment of the Chapter) greatly Deformed, Murtherers, or vitious People, nor any under eight and twenty years of age, may be re∣ceiv'd into this Order: yet the Grand Master may admit Boys of twelve years old, of what Nation soever they be, into Salary. Those also de∣sign'd to be taken into this Order, must be of comely Personage, strong Limbs, sound in Body and Mind, and of good Behavior; and every one must show that he belongs to the Priory he says he is of. They must as Probationers be∣fore they receive the Garment, stay a Year and a Day in the Cloister. The Servants, Brothers, and Chaplains, must not be of Vulgar Extract, but must manifest that they are descended from Worthy Parents, which have never wrought in any Handicraft, and have always liv'd honourably and ver∣tuously. The Pensioners, or Half-Cross-men, are to be receiv'd by Bailiffs, Priors, and others, with permission of the great Lord, and may wear but three Branches of the Cross of Malta on the left side of their Coat, and may not set the upper Branch. These may not be receiv'd if they be descended from Jews, Saracens, or Mahumetans; or if they have not liv'd well, or have exercis'd any Mechannick Art, and have not given some part of their Goods or Estate to the Order: but they may be Marry'd. No Knight, of what Dignity soever, may bestow his Goods farther than his Salary. For petty Crimes they allow a Sanctuary; but Robbers, or Pyrates, burners of Houses, betrayers of their Countrey, Thieves, false Witnesses, sacrilegious Persons, and such like, are ut∣terly excluded from all Mercy.

The chief Head of this Order calls himself Lowly, * 1.183 or Humble Servant of the holy House, or Hospital of St. John of Jerusalem, and of the Order of Soldiers of the holy Sepulchre of our Lord, Defender of Christian Arms. But the receiv'd Title is, The Illustrious and most Reverend Prince, Lord Prior A. of V. Great Master of the Hospital of St. John of Jerusalem, Prince of Malta and Gaza.

The Habit of the Grand Master is a long Coat, * 1.184 hanging down to the Ground, with wide Sleeves, and a round Bonnet upon his Head. For the up∣holding of his State and Grandeur, he hath several Commanderies, lying in every Priory, and united to the Grand Mastership.

After the death of one Grand Master, the Knights chuse another, who is af∣terwards Inaugurated with great State and Solemnity.

In brief, we will give you a Catalogue of all the Grand Masters since Gerard, the first Instituter of this Order, to the present Cottoner, by way of Chrono∣logy.

The first Grand Master, or rather Founder, of this Order was, * 1.185 as before re∣lated, one Gerard, though Menenius sets down one Raymond du Puy for the first, affirming that Gerard gave onely the first Fundamental Rules, but Raymond du Puy was the first Grand Master; however; we will begin with Gerard, who died in the Year 1118.

Raymond du Puy, a Dauphiner or Florentine, as Massiger will have it, by the Latines of his time call'd De Podio, the first Grand Master of the Hospital of St. John, according to the Tradition of the Knights; although some set before him one Roger, who in the Year 1130. as they say, had the Government. This Raymond seeing the Society increase in number, grow rich in Means, and that they were most of them nobly descended, perswaded them by his example to take up Arms for the defence of the Faith, as a Matter suitable to their Devotion and Nobility. According to the relation of the Knights themselves, this Ray∣mond,

and not Gerard, Instituted the wearing of a black Coat, with an eight-pointed white Cross. He also setled a general Assembly, wherein for the fu∣ture, Vacancies were to be suppli'd by the approbation of the Knights: which Rule Pope Calixtus the second allow'd and confirm'd in the Year 1120. and af∣terwards his Successors Decreed, That the Knights should live according to the Order of St. Augustine. This Raymond first bore in his Standards, or Ban∣ners, a Silver Cross in a yellow Field, by order of Pope Innocent in the Year 1130. and since that time the Spirituality distinguish'd into Knights, Chaplains, and Servants of the Hospital of St. John of Jerusalem. He died in the Year 1160.

Augea de Balben, a Dauphiner, died after three years Reign, in the Year 1167.

Arnold de Comps, deceased in the Year 1167.

Gilbert de Assaley, an English-man, unhappily brought the Order into a Debt of an hundred thousand Crowns, and therefore was dismissed in the Year 1169. but coming home to his Countrey by Sea, was cast away with all his People in the same Year.

Gaste, or Caste, succeeded, and died within the said Year 1169.

Joubert came next, and died in the Year 1179.

Moger, or Roger de Moulins, was kill'd in a Battel against Saladin, in the Year 1187.

Garnier of Naples in Syria, died of a mortal Wound receiv'd in Battel, ha∣ving Reign'd scarce six Moneths and ten Days, in the Year 1187.

Ermengar, or Emengar extracted out of the House of Aps in Vivarez, died in the Year 1192.

Godfrey of Duisson, died in the Year 1194.

Alfonsus, a Portuguese, was descended from the Kings of Portugal: but see∣ing himself envy'd by the Knights because of his morosity, laid down his Office, and went the same Year to Portugal, where he was poyson'd by his Brother in the Year 1026.

Godfrey, or Geofrey le Rat, Grand Prior of France, died in the Year 1027.

Guerin de Montaigu, of Avergne, in the Year 1230.

Bertrand de Texi deceased in Akra in the Year 1240.

Guerin, or Gerin, was taken Prisoner in a Battel against the Infidels, Corasmi∣ners, and sent to the Sultan of Egypt, where he died in the Year 1245.

Bertrand de Comps, a Dauphiner, died of his Wounds receiv'd against the Turks, in the Year 1248.

Peter de Vellebride, taken with Lewis King of France, in a Field-Battel, by the Sultan of Egypt, Melechsala, and released by the Hospitallers, in the Year 1251. and died at Akra in the same Year.

William de Castelnau, or of New Castile, of the Alberge of Avergne, died in the Year 1260.

Hugues de Revel, a Dauphiner, ended his Life in the Year 1278.

Nicholas de Orgue, deposed in the Year 1288.

John de Villiers, a French-man, died at Cyprus, in the City of Limesso, in the Year 1203.

Odon des Pins, of Provence, was for his carelesness and covetousnesness, cited to appear at Rome, and answer the Complaints of the Hospitallers, but died in the Way to Italy, in the Year 1296.

Guilliam de Villaret, born in Provence, or rather (according to Davity) of the House of Villaret in Dauphin, died also in Cyprus, having seen the downfall of all the Templars, in the Year 1338.

Folque, or Fulques de Villaret, a Branch of the same House, was (through the hatred of the Knights for his over-great austerity) dismissed, and Maurice de Pagnak of Provence chosen, to the great dislike of the Pope, who sent two Pre∣lates to Rhodes to take cognizance of the Matter, with Command to the Grand Master De Villaret and Pagnak, to appear before him in Avignon, as they did. In the mean time the Pope chose one Gerard des Pins, Governor of the Order, to be Grand Master. During this Contest Maurice de Pagnak died at Monpeliers, in the Year 1322. and then Folque was restor'd: but seeing himself afterwards ha∣ted of the Knights, he laid down his Office in the Year 1323. and liv'd like a private Knight: He died the first of September, and was bury'd at Monpeliers, in the Year 1327.

Elion of Velleneune, of Provence, was presented by the Knights before the Pope, to establish him in this Dignity. He held at Monpeliers a general Assembly, in the year 1330. two years after went to Rhodes, and clear'd the Order from all Debts, and enrich'd it. He got afterwards the Name of The Lucky Governor: He first commanded the Palace of the Grand Master to be fortifi'd with Walls and Towers, and divided the Languages, Bailiwicks, and Dignities of the Order. He died at Rhodes the 27 of May in the year 1346.

Deodat de Gozon of Provence, about four years before his Election had kill'd a Dragon or venomous Serpent, which poyson'd and devour'd the Inhabitants of Rhodes; for which cause (according to Megisser) he was call'd. The Dragon-killer. He died in the year 1353.

Peter of Coraillon of Provence, died the 24 of August, in the year 1355.

Roger des Pins, deceased the 28 of May, in the year 1356.

Raymout Berenger was extracted out of the antient House of the Berengers of Dauphin: He would have laid down his Office of his own accord, but Pope Gregory not permiting of it, he died Master in the year 1373.

Robert de Jully of Julliack, Grand Prior of France, died the 29 of June in the year 1376.

John Fernandez de Heredia, of the Alberge of Arragon, born at Valentia, was after a second Marriage made Knight, and chose Grand Master. He besieged the City of Patras in Morea, slew the Governor in Battel; but was afterwards in a Siege taken by the Turks, to whom he was forc'd to render Patras, and all the other conquer'd Places for his Release; yet the Turks carry'd him to Albania, and made him a Slave till the year 1381. when he was released: Afterwards he was deposed from his Dignity by Urban the sixth, because he went to Avignon to acknowledge Clement the eighth; and in the year 1383. was substituted in his Place Richard Caracciolo; but the Order would not own him: so that Richard died at Rome in the year 1395. in the life-time of Heredia, who yielded up qui∣etly his Life, in the year 1396.

Filibert de Nadaillack, or rather Naillack, of the French, Grand Prior of Aquitain, died after a Reign of 25 years, in the year 1421.

Anthony Fluvian, of the Language of Arragon: He Govern'd the Order with great Wisdom and Discretion, and died the 29 of October, in the year 1437.

John de Lastick of Dauphin, of the Alberge of Avergne, where he was Prior, and chosen to the Mastership in his absence: He held before his coming to Rhodes, an Assembly at Valentia in Dauphin, and came in the year 1438 to Rhodes, and died the 19 of May, in the year 1454.

Joubert, or Jaques de Milly, of the same Place, and where also he was Prior, died the 17 of August, in the year 1461.

Peter Raimond Zacosta, by Megisser call'd Acosta, of Arragon: He erected the eighth Alberge of Castile and Portugal, whereas before there were but seven, and built the Tower of St. Nicholas, at the Mouth of the Haven of Rhodes, in the Place where formerly the Collossus stood. He died at Rome the 21 of February, in the year 1467.

Baptista Ursina, of the Italians Alberge, sprung from the House of Ursina, a Prior at Rome, was chose the fourth of March 1467. and died the eighth of June, in the year 1476.

Peter de Aubusson, Prior of Avergne, died at Rhodes the third of July, in the 80 year of his Age, after a Reign of 27 years, in the year 1503.

Emery de Amboise, Grand Prior of France, died at Rhodes the 13 of November, in the year 1512.

Guy de Blanchefort, Prior of Avergne, Nephew of the Grand Master of Abous∣son: but passing in a Ship to Nice to Sail over to Rhodes, died on the Sea the 24 of November, in the year 1513.

Fabrice de Caretto, Extracted out of the Stock of Marquis de Finale, a Genouese, was Elected the fifth of December, in the year 1513. and died the 16 of January, in the year 1521.

Filips de Villiers d'Isle Adam, Grand Prior of France, during whose Government the Knights lost Rhodes, and got of the Emperor Charles, the Island Malta. He died at the Age of 70 years, the 21 of August, in the year 1543.

Perin de Ponte, an Italian, born at Ast, Unckle to Pope Julius the third, was chosen the 26 of August the same year, and died the 17 of November in the year 1535.

Didier de Tolon, of St. Jalle, of the Language of Provence, and Prior of Tho∣louse, died at Montpelier, being upon his departure for Malta, the 16 of September, in the year 1536.

Jan de Homedes, of the Alberge of Arragon, came after his Election the 21 of January 1538 to Malta. He had lost one of his Eyes in the Siege of Rhodes, and caus'd the Forts of St. Elmo and St. Michael to be built, and died in the 80 year of his Age, the 16 of September, in the year 1553.

Claude de la Sengle, of the French number, was chosen at Rome, whether he had been sent Ambassador, and came to Malta in January 1554. He enrich'd the Order very much, and died the 18 of August, in the year 1557.

Jan de Valette, that is to say, Parisot of Provence, was chosen the 21 of August 1557. to the great content of the whole Order, for the Respect he had from all Nations. In less than two years he was General, or Admiral of the Galleys, Marshal of Lango, Great Commander, Prior of St. Giles's, Lieutenant of the Grand Master, and lastly Grand Master. He erected a Castle on the Island Goze, forsook the Castle of St. Angelo, and went to the Borough of Malta, which he valiantly defended in the year 1565. against all the Power of the Turk. Af∣ter the breaking up of the Siege, he new fortifi'd the Island, and begun the new City, from his Name call'd Valette; whereof he laid the first Stone the 28 of March, in the year 1566, and proceeded in the building of it, with per∣mission of the Pope for the Labourers to work on Holidays. He died the 21 of August, (being the day of his Election) in the year 1561.

Peter de Mont of Italy, proceeded in the building of the new City, wherein he setled the Residence of the Order, and made his entrance into the same with all his Knights on the 18 of March 1571. and died the 17 of January, in the year 1572.

John Bishop of Cassiere in Provence, but a Gascon born, erected the great Church of St. John Baptist in Valette, and gave a Revenue of a thousand Crowns, with a Chappel adjoyning, for the Interment of the Corps of the Grand Masters his Predecessors de novo. He fell into hatred with many Knights, and was summon'd to Rome. In the mean time Pope Gregory the Eighth sending one Gaspar Vicomte to Malta, to Govern the Order during his absence, he died at Rome the 21 of December, in the year 1585. aged 78 years.

Hugues de Loubenx Verdale, of the Alberge of Provence, but a Gasconer by birth, was elected the 12 of January, 1582. He had from his youth exercis'd himself in Letters and Arms, amended or repair'd the Fortifications of the Island, reform'd the Election of the Order, caus'd a History to be written of their Acts, by one Jaques Bosio, to the Expence of the Order of more than two hun∣dred thousand Crowns, which they were indebted; and therefore was accus'd by the Treasury-Chamber, That he had imploy'd it ill. He died at last in Malta, the fourth of May, in the year 1595.

Martin Garcez, of the Language of Arragon, was Elected the eighth of May, 1595. in the sixtieth year of his Age. He took off Customs and Impositions, and Commanded, That no Knight, nor Grand Master himself, should particu∣larly for his own Advantage go and take Prizes of the Turks. He died the se∣venth of February, in the year 1601.

Alof de Wignacourt, a Frenchman, had been formerly Grand Hospitaller of the Order, and Captain of the New City. He was Chosen the 10 of February, in the year 1601. He furnish'd the City Valette with good Water from di∣stant Springs, and strengthned the Island with divers new Fortifications. He died the fourth of September, in the year 1622.

Louys de Mendez, of Vasconsales, a Portuguese, was Elected the 27 of September, in the year 1622. and died the 17 of March in the following year 1623.

Anthony de Paul, of Provence, but extracted from the House of Paul of Tholouse, was Elected the 12 of March, in the year 1623. and died in the year 1636.

Johan Paulus Laskaris, a Piedmontese, of the Alberge of Provence, was chosen the 12 of June, 1636. at seventy years of age, having been made Knight for his great Deserts, the 24 of April, in the year 1583. He died, being 90 years old, in the year 1657.

After Laskaris, follow'd Martinis de Rodin, who died in the same year 1657. Then succeeded Annetus Clermon de Gissans, who died in the year 1660. After him, Raphael Cottener, who deceas'd in the year 1663. and was succeeded by Nicolaus Cottener. So that to conclude, At Jerusalem, Margat, and Ptolomais, have been four and twenty Grand Masters; at Rhodes, seventeen; and at Malta, nineteen: In all, sixty.

The Islands of Comin and Cominot.

THe small Islands of Comin and Cominot, lying Westward between Malta and Gozo, are both subject to the Commands of the Malteses: Both at this day Inhabited; but first Peopled by the diligent care of the Grand Master Wignacourt, who for the better security thereof, erected a Fort upon it. Cluverius taketh Comin for the ancient Hefestia, or Island of Vulcan, being very small, not above four English Miles in compass, but exceeding full of Cattel. To the Southward of this lieth Folfola, or Forfora.

The Island of Goze, or Gozo.

THis Island, by the Italians call'd Goze; by the Sicilians, Gozo; by the In∣habitants, Gaudish; and by the Arabians, who sometimes possess'd it, Gaudosh; is taken for the Gaulos of Pliny and Mela, and the Gaudos of Strabo; but Mercator makes it to be the Isle by the Ancients dedicated to Juno.

It lieth about two Miles West-North-West from Malta, containing about eight Miles in circumference, three in length, and one and a half in breadth; so surrounded with Cliffs and Rocks, that it is dangerous to come at it.

There are no great Towns, but only small Villages, and the Houses gene∣rally built at great Distances: The chiefest are, Scilendi, Douere, and Muggiare.

The Air is very healthful: The Ground to admiration fertile, with many easie and delighful Ascents, every where water'd with innumerable Springs, and producing Corn and Fruit, sufficient not only to the Inhabitants, but af∣fording some to those of Malta. There are a great many Sheep, Hares, Fowl, and plenty of Honey. Towards the side of Barbary riseth a natural Rock, where brave Faulcons are taken, whereof the Grand Master sends yearly to the King of Spain for an acknowledgment.

The Inhabitants in Nature resemble those of Malta, and speak, like them, bro∣ken Arabick. There are about five thousand Resiants, whom the Turks invaded and miserably spoiled in the year Fifteen hundred fifty one. There is a Castle seated on a Hill; but small, and of little consequence; yet stored with a large number of Ordnance, and underneath defended by a Fort, newly strengthned in the year Sixteen hundred and eighteen, with a Bulwark.

The Island is a Peculiar of the Grand Master of Malta, who calls himself Prince of it, and sends thither one with the Title of Governor every three Years.

The Inhabitants, although they speak Arabick, nevertheless embrace the Chri∣stian Religion.

The Island of Lampadouse.

THe Island of Lampadouse, by the Italians call'd Lampedosa, and by Ptolomy, Lipadusa, lieth about five and twenty Miles West-South-West from Malta, in four and thirty Degrees North Latitude.

It remains desolate, and without Inhabitants. Ariosto, in his Orlando Furioso, represents this Island without Houses; but Cruzius affirms, That there are the Ruines seen of an old Castle, Houses, Walls, and Towers of Cities; but that none can remain there, because of a Nootlot; by which Word they seem to mean, Apparitions of Spirits, as the same Cruzius insinuates, when he says, The Place is every Night disturb'd and haunted with uncouth and mischievous Spectrums. However, this remains undoubtedly true, That there is a Church call'd St. Mary of Lampadouse, divided into two parts; the one part dedicated to the Reli∣gious of the Christians, and visited by Travellers, which come to offer there Money, Clothes, Bread, Gun-powder, Bullets, and many other things; the

other by the Turks, which also come there to offer, with like devotion in their way; but neither of these take away any thing of what is brought there, it being both reported and believ'd, That he that brings nothing, or will take any thing, cannot come off with such their Sacrilegious Pilferings. However, the Knights come thither with their Galleys, and take away the Gifts there left by the Christians, which they carry to Sicily, to the Hospital of Trepani, call'd Nunciata, for the maintenance of Sick, as well as Poor; or else to Malta.

The Island of Linose.

THe Island of Linose, by Ptolomy (if Sanutus guess not amiss) call'd Ethu∣so, and made African, lies seven or eight Miles, or according to Brevis, five Miles to the North-East of Lampadouse, in four and thirry De∣grees North Latitude, almost over against the City of Mahometa in Barbary: The Circumference about five Miles; but affording no convenient place to receive Shipping.

In the Year Fifteen hundred sixty five, the Turks besieg'd Malta and Gozo, with eight and thirty thousand Soldiers, and a hundred ninety three Ships, Galleys, Galleons, and Brigantines, under the chief Command of the Bassa Mustapha, and his Substitute Bassa Piali, in this order. The Turkish Forces ap∣pear'd the eighteenth of June, about four or five Miles from Malta; upon no∣tice whereof from the Castle, and the Old City St. Angelo, a great fear possess'd the poor People in the Countrey, who immediately betook themselves, with what they had, to the Fortifi'd Places; but the Knights, Soldiers, and other Warlike People, betook themselves to Arms. The Grand Master De Valette caus'd immediately all the Water on the Island to be poyson'd with Arsnick, or Ratsbane, and other appropriate Drugs; and muster'd all his Forces, consist∣ing of about eight thousand five hundred Fighting Men of all Nations; with one Troop of Banditi, or Exiles, of Cicilia, who behav'd themselves very vali∣antly. In the Night the Turks went out with a Rere-guard of five and thirty Ships, and set three thousand Men on Shore by the Cape of St. Thomas, who were follow'd continually by many others in Barques; for their Landing in the day-time was prevented by the Marshal Copier, who was drawn thither with a thousand Horse; but the Grand Master commanded him at last, That as soon as the Enemy was Landed, he should Retreat to the Fort; and sent the General of Gio, with a Troop of Knights and Foot-Soldiers, to impede their March. The Marshal, before he had receiv'd these Orders, had sent a Party of Horse, under the Conduct of one Egaras, to Mugaro, to get Intelli∣gence, and to entrap one Turk or other, in hopes to learn some News: But this prevented not their coming on, and making further Attempts; whereby, after many flerce Assaults made upon the Besiged, with the loss of many of their Men, the Besieged at last were reduc'd to Extremity; when in a lucky Hour, they receiv'd not only Comfort, but fresh Courage, by the coming of Don Alvaro Garcia, who after a long stay, provided with a good number of Ships and Soldiers, came in the sight of Malta about Noon, on the sixteenth of September, in the year Fifteen hundred fifty six; but kept till the next Break of day about the Island Comin; and then he approach'd with his Fleet under Malta, by a Place call'd Melekka, and Landed all his Aids in less than an Hours

time; but went back himself with his Galleys to Sicily, with promise to return again in six days. Hereupon both the Bassa's gave command to Fire all the Guns against the Fort, and the Island Sengle, and immediately to bring them on Board the Ships; and so presently forsaking their Trenches, and setting their Huts on fire, sail'd away with their Fleet. The Bassa's arriving at Galipolis, made their Adventures known to the Grand Seignior by Letters, and how that since their departure from Constantinople, they had lost thirty thousand Seamen and Soldiers together. The Grand Seignior receiv'd this Letter with so much discontent, that he threw it on the ground, and said with a loud voice, That his Sword had no luck in another Mans Hand: Yet notwithstanding, the Bassa's were receiv'd with signs of great Honor at Constantinople, with the Beatings of Drums, and Sounding of other Instruments.

The Pope also held a Solemn Procession at Rome, wherein himself in Person assisted, to thank God for the Preservation and Deliverance of Malta; and wish'd the Grand Master, in his Letter to him of the tenth of October, much Happiness with his Glorious Victory. The Grand Master Valette caus'd by a Collection to be gather'd at Lyons, Marseiles, Lovorn, Naples, and on other Pla∣ces, Gunpowder, Saltpetre, Metal for casting Guns, all sorts of Arms, Masts for Shipping, all sorts of Necessaries of Wood and Iron, and other needful Things, for the strengthening of the Island. Moreover it was concluded (for the better conveniency of the Island) to build a City on the Mountain Sceber∣ras. Towards the building of this City, since call'd Valette, thirty thousand Escues, or Gold Crowns, were taken up at Interest by the Order at Palermo: The Pope himself gave to that end five thousand out of his own Purse, and sent thither a great quantity of Gunpowder and Saltpetre, with a Master-Build∣er call'd Francois Laparel, and offer'd the Grand Master a Cardinals Cap; but he modestly refus'd the same. The King of Spain gave towards this Building a Present of thirty thousand Escues; the King of Portugal, thirty thousand Cru∣sadoes; and the French King, a hundred and forty thousand Guilders. Then im∣mediately, by the command of the Grand Master, all sorts of People were set to work upon the Fortifications, and to scowr and cleanse the Ditches and Moats, to which the Knights themselves put their helping hand: And from the Castle of St. Elmo, where onely before a Ditch had been, there was now a Moat cut in the Rock, down to the Sea.

The Grand Master being brought to the corner of the Bulwark St. John, af∣ter many Benedictions, and other Ceremonies, laid the first Stone of this Ci∣ty: Whereupon the Master-Builder Laparel kiss'd his hands, and had bestow'd on him a gold Chain with a Medal, which the Grand Master put about his neck. Under this Stone several Gold, Silver, and Copper Medals were laid, for an everlasting Mark and Remembrance of the Building, whereof the best had this Latin Inscription, Immotam Colli dedit, that is, He hath built the City immove∣able upon a Rock. On this first Stone Letters were cut, which manifested the utmost danger which they endur'd in this Siege, with the Happy Success, and their Deliverance; and likewise the Occasion and Reason of this Building, with a Prayer to God, and the Name of the Grand Master Valette the Founder. The same Grand Master presented the City likewise with a Coat of Arms, being upon a Round Scutcheon, a Field Or, charg'd with a Lion Gules: After which Ceremony, all the Guns round about were Fir'd, and Gold and Silver Money, Coyn'd with the Picture of the Grand Master, thrown amongst the People, who all cry'd, Vive le Grand Valette, that is, Long live the Grand Valette. The

Charges to the Workmen amounted daily to the Sum of fifteen hundred or two thousand Crowns; but to ease the Payment, and to make good the Char∣ges, the Grand Master caus'd Copper Money to be made: One Piece to the value of two Tarins; on the one side, with the Arms of the Order and the Grand Master; and on the other side, with the Mark or Ensign of his Digni∣ty, with these Words about the Border, Non Aes, sed Fides; that is, Not Coyn, but Fidelity.

The Island of Pantalaree.

THis Island (which Mercator holds to be the Cossyra of Ptolomy; but others, the Pacinia of the same Author) lieth between Sicily and the Main Land of Africa; or between Malta and Tunis, two or three Miles from the City Mahometa, right over against Susa, a City in the Kingdom of Tunis, in five and thirty Degrees North Latitude, according to Hues.

It comprehends in Circuit about seven or eight Miles, and in breadth three or four. On the Sea-shore, toward the North side, lieth a City of the same Name with the Island, Fortified with an unaccessible Castle, built upon a steep and pointed Rock.

The most part of it appears Mountainous, full of great Rocks and Cliffs, yielding a glittering black Stone. In the midst of the Island may be seen an Abyss, or Bottomless-pit, call'd Fossa. The dryness of the Soil makes it unca∣pable to bring forth Rain: But it affords variety of Pot-herbs, abundance of Cotton, Annise, Capers, Figs, Melons, and excellent Grapes. There grow also little Trees, by the Moors call'd Ver; and by those of Sicily, Sinko; which bears a round, sharp, and red Fruit, but becoming black in ripening, of which the Inhabitants make Oyl, useful not onely to burn in Lamps, but to eat; wherewith the Women anoint their Heads and Hair, both for Ornament, and to make it grow thicker. There are no Horses, but Oxen in great numbers, with which they Till the Ground. These Islanders live hardily, and are dexte∣rous in Swimming; and although they use both the Arabick Habits and Lan∣guage, yet they have approv'd themselves to be good Christians.

Thus having penetrated the Center and Inmost Parts of Africa, till of late altogether unknown; and accurately set forth the Circumference and Coasts of its vast Dominions; Describing exactly, and by good Authority, large Tracts of Land, hitherto not so much as once heard of, or in the least survey∣ed by the most Modern Authors: Our next Voyage (by Gods Conduct) we intend for America; hoping to receive that good Encouragement, that shall en∣able us to lead you through that New and Golden World, where you shall meet with the like, or more Variety of Wonders, than hitherto hath pierc'd any English Ear.

FINIS.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Merkat. Magin. Ortel.
• * 1.2

  Situation. Flakkourt. Fraxscis. Can∣che.
• * 1.3

  Divided into Territories.
• * 1.4

  The spreading of the Coast.
• * 1.5

  Borders.
• * 1.6

  Rivers.
• * 1.7

  The River Franshere.
• * 1.8

  Vohitsmassian.
• * 1.9

  Religion.
• * 1.10

  Hatred of the Inhabi∣tants against the French.
• * 1.11

  The River Manampani.
• * 1.12

  Employment.
• * 1.13

  The Territory of Izame.
• * 1.14

  Rivers.
• * 1.15

  The Constitution.
• * 1.16

  Manners.
• * 1.17

  Cloathing.
• * 1.18

  Arms.
• * 1.19

  Religion.
• * 1.20

  Itomampo.
• * 1.21

  Ikondre.
• * 1.22

  Vattemanahon.
• * 1.23

  Manamboule.
• * 1.24

  Anachimoussi.
• * 1.25

  Rivers.
• * 1.26

  Nature of the Soil.
• * 1.27

  Borders.
• * 1.28

  Vohits-anghombe.
• * 1.29

  The River Mansiatre.
• * 1.30

  The River Mananghara.
• * 1.31

  The Territory of Mata∣tane.
• * 1.32

  Religion.
• * 1.33

  The River Avibaha.
• * 1.34

  The Territory of Voulou∣ilou.
• * 1.35

  The River Ambato.
• * 1.36

  The River of Manang∣harou.
• * 1.37

  The Countrey of Audou∣vouche.
• * 1.38

  The Condition of the Land.
• * 1.39

  Customs.
• * 1.40

  Employment.
• * 1.41

  Riches.
• * 1.42

  Religion.
• * 1.43

  Government.
• * 1.44

  The Territory of Ca∣remboulle.
• * 1.45

  The River Yonglahe.
• * 1.46

  Minerals, or Mynes.
• * 1.47

  Precious Stones.
• * 1.48

  Waters.
• * 1.49

  Four setts of Honey.
• * 1.50

  Oile.
• * 1.51

  Roots.
• * 1.52

  Fruits.
• * 1.53

  Beasts.
• * 1.54

  Vermin.
• * 1.55

  Fow••.
• * 1.56

  Worms.
• * 1.57

  An amphibious Creature.
• * 1.58

  Nature of the Inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.59

  Linschot.
• * 1.60

  Their Disposition.
• * 1.61

  Employment.
• * 1.62

  Fishing.
• * 1.63

  Games.
• * 1.64

  An Herb call'd Gold-••nappe.
• * 1.65

  Songs and Dancings.
• * 1.66

  Houses.
• * 1.67

  House-warming.
• * 1.68

  Housholdstuff.
• * 1.69

  Habit.
• * 1.70

  Ornaments.
• * 1.71

  Marriage.
• * 1.72

  The manner of their Fu∣nerals.
• * 1.73

  Oath.
• * 1.74

  An abominable deed in forsaking their Children.
• * 1.75

  Their manner of Eating.
• * 1.76

  Food.
• * 1.77

  Language.
• * 1.78

  Paper made.
• * 1.79

  Ink made.
• * 1.80

  Writing-Pens.
• * 1.81

  Atithmetick.
• * 1.82

  Weight.
• * 1.83

  Measure.
• * 1.84

  Merchandise.
• * 1.85

  Riche••.
• * 1.86

  The manner of their Wars.
• * 1.87

  Arms.
• * 1.88

  Knowledge of the Stars.
• * 1.89

  Spirits are seven-fold.
• * 1.90

  Circumcision.
• * 1.91

  Government.
• * 1.92

  Sir Thomas Rot.
• * 1.93

  Clothes.
• * 1.94

  Government.
• * 1.95

  Religion.
• * 1.96

  Castle St. Sebastian.
• * 1.97

  Unwholsomness of the Air.
• * 1.98

  The Soil.
• * 1.99

  Apparel.
• * 1.100

  Food.
• * 1.101

  Revenues.
• * 1.102

  Religion.
• * 1.103

  Government.
• * 1.104

  Linschet writes of it in Gniuee.
• * 1.105

  Air.
• * 1.106

  Situation.
• * 1.107

  Number.
• * 1.108

  Salt-Island.
• * 1.109

  The Island Boavista.
• * 1.110

  Island St. Jago.
• * 1.111

  Island del Fogo.
• * 1.112

  Island del Brava.
• * 1.113

  Island St. Nicholas.
• * 1.114

  Island St. Lucie.
• * 1.115

  Island St. Vincent.
• * 1.116

  Island St Anthony.
• * 1.117

  Air.
• * 1.118

  Plants.
• * 1.119

  Beasts.
• * 1.120

  Riches.
• * 1.121

  Gramage. lib. 9. c. 3.
• * 1.122

  Situation.
• * 1.123

  When found.
• * 1.124

  The quantity of the Islands in general.
• * 1.125

  Cattel.
• * 1.126

  The constitution of the Inhabitants.
• * 1.127

  Government.
• * 1.128

  Religion.
• * 1.129

  Gramay lib. 9. c. 3.
• * 1.130

  Bacchius.
• * 1.131

  The Royal Society of London.
• * 1.132

  Ortelius Syntagm.
• * 1.133

  Gramay, Afr, lib. 9.
• * 1.134

  Cadam. Sanu••.
• * 1.135

  The House of the ••ick.
• * 1.136

  Magazine of Arm••••
• * 1.137

  Fort St. Angelo.
• * 1.138

  Fort St. Michael.
• * 1.139

  Old Malta.
• * 1.140

  Towns.
• (a) 1.141

  Or Nasciaro.
• (b) 1.142

  Or Mossa.
• (c) 1.143

  Or Di Loreto.
• (d) 1.144

  Or Saf.
• (e) 1.145

  Or Mechabib.
• (f) 1.146

  Or Siggo.
• (g) 1.147

  Or Gighibir.
• (h) 1.148

  Or Scilia.
• (i) 1.149

  Or Sabbug.
• (k) 1.150

  Or Grendi.
• (l) 1.151

  Or Miliers.
• (m) 1.152

  Or Bukkaro.
• * 1.153

  The Garden Boschetto.
• * 1.154

  The Court Balda.
• * 1.155

  The strange power of the Stony Rocks.
• * 1.156

  Beasts.
• * 1.157

  Cloathing.
• * 1.158

  Language.
• * 1.159

  Burial.
• * 1.160

  Riches.
• * 1.161

  A••••••s.
• * 1.162

  Ancient Government.
• * 1.163

  The original of St. Johns Order, or Knights of Malta
• * 1.164

  Downfal of the Knights.
• * 1.165

  They are drove out of Jerusalem.
• * 1.166

  The Knights are drove out of the Holy-Land.
• * 1.167

  The Knights take their abode in Malta.
• * 1.168

  A Letter from the Grand Master Lackaris.
• * 1.169

  The Goods of this Or∣der.
• * 1.170

  Laskaris in a Letter of 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 1.171

  The Knights are distin∣guish'd into several Ranks.
• * 1.172

  The Knights are distin∣guish'd into eight Langua∣ges.
• * 1.173

  Language of Provence.
• * 1.174

  Language of Avergne.
• * 1.175

  Language of France.
• * 1.176

  Language of Italy.
• * 1.177

  Language of Arragon.
• * 1.178

  Language of England.
• * 1.179

  The Germane Language.
• * 1.180

  Language of Castile.
• * 1.181

  Who are receiv'd into this Order.
• * 1.182

  The Election of the Or∣der.
• * 1.183

  The Title of the Grand Master.
• * 1.184

  Garments.
• * 1.185

  The first Grand Master.